Skip to main content

Full text of "Manual: PCS Phone - Handspring Treo 300 User Guide"

See other formats


Sprint 



Online User's Guide 

PCS Phone 

Handspring® Treo™ 300 
User Guide 




handspring 



Copyright 

Copyright © 2002 Sprint Spectrum L.P. All rights reserved. No reproduction in whole or in part 
without prior written approval. Sprint, and the diamond logo are trademarks of Sprint 
Communications Company L.P. All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. 
Portions copyright © 2002 Handspring, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Handspring, Treo, and the Treo 
logo are trademarks of Handspring, Inc. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Blazer and the 
Handspring logo are trademarks of Handspring Inc., are registered trademarks in the U.S.A., and 
may be registered in other jurisdictions. Portions copyright © 1998-2002 Palm, Inc. or its 
subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Palm OS and HotSync are registered trademarks and Palm and the 
Palm Powered logo are trademarks of Palm, Inc. and are used by Handspring under license. All other 
trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners. 

Disclaimer and limitation of liability 

Handspring, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from 
the use of this handbook. 

Handspring, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that 
may arise through the use of this software. Handspring, Inc. and its suppliers assume no 
responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead 
battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect 
against data loss. 

Warranty and License Agreement 

For warranty information and a copy of the End User License Agreement applicable to your 
Handspring product, please see the Handspring web site at 
http://support.handspring.com/esupport/forms/hsFileList.jsp?T)'pe=Warranties. 

If you would like a copy of these materials mailed to you, or if you have any questions, please contact 
Handspring Customer Support. 

The information included on this web site sets forth Handspring's sole and complete warranty and 
software licensing obligations with respect to your Handspring product. Use of the product indicates 
your acceptance of the terms of the warranty and the End User License Agreement. 

Software download available 

Wireless setup and desktop synchronization software are supplied on the Handspring CD-ROM disc. 
If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive foryour computer, you can download this software from 
www.sprintpcs.com. 



Contents 

1. Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring* Treo™ 300 1 

What is a PCS Treo 300? 2 

System requirements 2 

Minimum requirements 2 

Upgrade information 3 

PCS Treo 300 components 5 

Charging the battery 9 

Turning your PCS Treo 300 on and off 10 

Using the keyboard backlight 10 

Adjusting the display 11 

Using the stylus to get things done 12 

Elements of the phone interface 13 

Moving around the screen 14 

Displaying online tips 15 

Customizing your phone 15 

Using the headset 18 

Connecting the HotSync cable 19 

Using desktop software 20 

Using your phone with Palm Desktop software 21 

Using your phone with Microsoft Outlook 22 

Using your phone with another PIM 22 

Using an e-mail application with your phone 22 

2. Entering Data in Your Phone 23 

Using the PCS Treo 300 keyboard 24 

Typing capital letters 24 

Typing numbers and symbols 25 

Typing accented characters 26 

Typing extended characters 26 

Navigation keystrokes 28 

Using menus 28 

Using text Shortcuts 30 

Using the onscreen keyboard 31 

Using your computer keyboard 32 

Importing data 32 

3. Managing Your Applications 35 

Using the Applications Launcher 36 

Opening applications 36 

Switching between applications 37 

Categorizing applications 37 

Changing the Applications Launcher display 38 



Choosing preferences 39 

Installing and removing applications 39 

Installing add-on applications 39 

Removing applications 42 

Removing Palm Desktop software 43 

Security 43 

Assigning a password 44 

Changing or deleting a password 45 

Recovering from a forgotten password 46 

4. Applications Overview 47 

PhoneBook 48 

Date Book Plus 49 

Blazer Web Browser 50 

Memo Pad 51 

SMS 52 

To Do List 53 

CityTime 54 

Calculator 55 

Expense 56 

5. Common Tasks 57 

Creating records 58 

Editing records 59 

Entering text 59 

Edit menu 59 

Deleting records 60 

Other ways to delete records 61 

Purging records 61 

Categorizing records 62 

System-defined and user-defined categories 62 

Finding records 66 

Looking up Contacts records in PhoneBook 66 

Using Find 67 

Using Phone Number Lookup 68 

Sorting lists of records 71 

Making records private 72 

Hiding and masking private records 72 

Attaching notes 74 

Choosing fonts 75 

Exchanging and updating data: HotSync operations 76 

Performing a HotSync operation for the first time 76 

Beaming information 78 



6. Application-Specific Tasks 81 

PhoneBook 82 

Using the Speed Dial view 84 

Using the Dial Pad view 89 

Using the Contacts view 89 

Using the Call History view 94 

Using the Active Call view 97 

Checking voicemail 103 

Forwarding calls 104 

Other ways to make a call 104 

PhoneBook menus 106 

Date Book Plus 113 

Working in Day View 113 

Scheduling an event 114 

Rescheduling an event 116 

Setting an alarm for an event 117 

Scheduling repeating or continuous events 118 

Changing the Date Book Plus view 121 

Working in Week View 122 

Working in Week View with Text 123 

Working in Month View 124 

Working in Year View 125 

Working in List View 125 

Spotting event conflicts 126 

Working with floating events 127 

Working with To Do items 128 

Using the Daily Journal 129 

Using templates 129 

Date Book Plus menus 130 

Iter 139 

Viewing web pages 139 

Working with bookmarks 140 

Blazer menus 145 

Memo Pad 149 

Reviewing memos 149 

Memo Pad menus 150 

SMS 151 

Receiving text messages 151 

Viewing text messages 152 

Responding to text messages 153 



Copying text messages 154 

Sorting messages 155 

Deleting messages 155 

SMS menus 156 

To Do List 158 

Setting priority 158 

Setting a due date 159 

Assigning a category 160 

Checking off a To Do item 160 

To Do Show Options 161 

To Do List menus 162 

CityTime 163 

Setting your home city 163 

Selecting remote cities 163 

Adding cities 164 

CityTime menus 164 

Calculator 166 

Selecting the Calculator mode 166 

Using the Basic Calculator buttons 166 

Displaying Recent Calculations 167 

Using the Advanced Calculator mode 167 

Using the Advanced Calculator buttons 168 

Creating a custom view 176 

Calculator menus 177 

Expense 178 

Changing the date of an Expense item 179 

Entering receipt details 179 

Customizing the Currency pick list 180 

Show Options 182 

Transferring your data to Microsoft Excel 182 

Expense menus 186 

7. Setting Preferences for Your Phone 189 

Viewing Preferences 190 

Buttons Preferences 190 

HotSync Buttons Preferences 191 

Connection Preferences 191 

Predefined configurations 192 

Connection Methods 192 

Setting an infrared to modem configuration 193 

Digitizer Preferences 194 



Formats Preferences 195 

Country default 195 

Time, date, week start, and numbers formats 195 

General Preferences 196 

Auto-off delay 196 

System, alarm, and game sounds 197 

Network Preferences 197 

Connecting automatically 198 

Creating a new packet data configuration 198 

Connecting to your service 202 

Adding detailed information to a Mobile IP service template 202 

Adding detailed information to a Simple IP service template 205 

Deleting a service template 208 

Network Preferences menu commands 209 

Troubleshooting network connections 209 

Owner Preferences 210 

Ringer Preferences 211 

Shortcuts Preferences 213 

Creating a Shortcut 213 

Editing a Shortcut 214 

Deleting a Shortcut 214 

8. Advanced HotSync® Operations 215 

Selecting HotSync setup options 216 

Customizing HotSync application settings 218 

IR HotSync operations 219 

Preparing your computer for infrared communication 220 

Configuring HotSync Manager for infrared communication 222 

Perfonning an IR HotSync operation 223 

Returning to serial cable HotSync operations 224 

Conducting a HotSync operation via a network 225 

Perfonning a network HotSync operation via a LAN 227 

Using File Link 227 

Creating a user profile 228 

9. Maintaining Your Phone 231 

Caring for your phone 232 

Battery considerations 232 

Resetting your phone 233 

Perfonning a soft reset 233 

Perfonning a warm (or safe) reset 234 

Perfonning a hard reset 235 



10. Troubleshooting Tips 239 

Software installation problems 240 

Operating problems 241 

Tapping and keyboard problems 241 

Wireless communication problems 242 

Application problems 245 

HotSync problems 246 

Beaming problems 247 

Password problems 248 

Technical support 249 

11. Other Product Information 251 

Performance and Safety 251 

Important Information About Your Phone and Service 251 

Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone 252 

Caring for and Protecting Your Phone Battery 253 

Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice 253 

User Guide Proprietary Notice 254 

Handspring Product Warranty 254 

Handspring, Inc. End User Software License Agreement 255 

GNU Library General Public License 257 

Acknowledgments 264 



1 



Introduction to Your PCS Phone 
Handspring Treo™ 300 

This chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on your PCS 
Phone Handspring" Treo™ 300, how to use your phone for the first 
time, and how to install Palm™ Desktop software and the HotSync 1 
Manager synchronization software so you can synchronize your phone and 
your computer. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



What is a PCS Treo 300? 

Your PCS Treo 300 combines the power of a full-featured mobile phone, a 
Palm OS" handheld, and the Internet in one compact and indispensable 
device. With your PCS Treo 300, you can do everything you can do with 
your existing mobile phone with greater speed and ease. You can store 
thousands of numbers in your PhoneBook and up to 50 speed dial 
entries, and dial any of them with just a few keystrokes. You can even set 
up a 3-way conference call by initiating and joining two calls and use the 
personal speakerphone for hands-free use without a headset attachment. 

Lighten your load. Everything you need is in one compact device. Your 
PCS Treo 300 helps you stay in touch. With instant access to your e-mail, 
you can send and receive e-mail from anywhere, and receive text 
messages from other PCS phones. The award-winning Blazer" web 
browser gives you access to any site on the Internet — not just a few 
optimized for mobile access; now you can download directions, confirm 
flight reservations, find a restaurant, and check stock prices wherever you 
are. Everything you need to stay organized is close at hand on your 
phone, including popular Palm OS applications such as Date Book Plus, 
PhoneBook, To Do List, Memo Pad and more. 

To make sure you don't lose any of this important information, you can 
synchronize your data with desktop software on your computer so you 
always have a backup copy. 

System requirements 

To install and operate Palm Desktop software and the HotSync Manager 
synchronization software, your computer system must meet the following 
requirements: 

Minimum requirements 

► Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP with USB 
port, (for USB HotSync® cable) 

-or- 

Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, 
or Windows NT 4.0 with serial port (for optional serial HotSync cable 
— sold separately) 

► 32 MB RAM (memory) 



2 



Section 1 

introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



». 25 MB available hard disk space 
». VGA monitor or better 

». CD-ROM drive (you can also download Palm Desktop software from 

www.sprintpcs.com) 
». Internet Explorer 5.01 or higher (recommended) 

Upgrade information 

If you already own a Palm OS" handheld, you still must install the 
version of Palm Desktop software that comes with your PCS Treo 300 into 
the same folder as your current Palm Desktop software. When you install 
the new version in the same folder as the previous version, all your data is 
preserved. If you use another personal information manager (PIM), you 
still need to install Palm Desktop software in order to update the HotSync 
Manager on your computer. You perform HotSync operations in exactly 
the same way, so you can quickly synchronize your old data with your 
new phone. 

To upgrade: 

1 . Synchronize your old handheld with your old Palm Desktop 
software. This ensures that the latest information from your 
handheld is on your desktop computer. 

2. (Optional) To ensure against any data loss, go to the folder that 
stores Palm Desktop software (this is usually the Handspring or Palm 
folder), copy (do not move) your user name folder, and store the 
copy outside the Palm Desktop software folder. 

3. Follow the installation instructions that begin on page 2 1 . Be sure to 
install the new software in the same folder as the old software. 

4. Connect your new PCS Treo 300 to the HotSync cable and press the 
HotSync button on the cable. If the Select User dialog box appears, 
select your user name. 

5. Compare the applications on your old handheld and your PCS Treo 
300. 

6. Beam any third party applications that did not transfer from your old 
handheld to your PCS Treo 300, or install them from the original 
files. 

Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



7. If any data for your third party applications did not transfer, beam it 
from your old handheld to your PCS Treo 300. 

8. If you created a password on your old handheld, enter it on your PCS 
Treo 300. 



Note: Records you previously marked Private remain marked Private, but 
you need to reenter a password on your PCS Treo 300. 

9. If you had any important settings on your old handheld, such as 
Network Preferences, manually copy them from your old handheld 
to your PCS Treo 300. 

Each device must have a unique name 

After you complete the upgrade process described above, you have two 
devices with the same name. This is an undesirable situation. Each 
device must have a unique name in order to prevent unexpected results 
during HotSync operations and other complications. 

We strongly recommend that you perform a hard reset on your old 
handheld. See page 235 for details. 

A hard reset not only erases all data from the old handheld; it also erases 
the name and makes that handheld a clean slate, ready to receive a new 
name. The next time you perform a HotSync operation with this old 
handheld, you are asked to give it a name. Be sure to give it a unique 
name. 



4 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring® Treo™ 300 



PCS Treo 300 components 
Locating front panel controls 




Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



1 . Speaker: Functions as the earpiece on your PCS Treo 300. 

2. Headset jack: Enables you to connect a hands-free headset for use 
with the wireless features. Use only headsets that are compatible with 
your PCS Treo 300. See page 18 for details. 

3. Rocker switch: Enables you to navigate on your phone with just 
one hand. You can use the rocker switch as an alternate method to 
perform a variety of tasks, such as adjusting the call volume level on 
your phone. The rocker switch functions change based on whether 
your phone's wireless mode is on or off and which application you 
are using. 

To use the rocker switch, roll the dial up or down, press it in and 
release it, or press and hold it. 

4. Contrast/Brightness control: Opens the Adjust Display dialog box 
where you can adjust the appearance of your phone screen for the 
clearest screen display. The contrast/brightness control is activated by 
the Option key. See page 11 for instructions. 

5. Option key: Types the number/symbol, or activates the function, 
that appears in blue on the key 

6. Microphone: Functions as the mouthpiece when you use the 
wireless phone features of your PCS Treo 300. 

7. Scroll buttons: Displays text and other information that extends 
beyond the area of the phone screen. Pressing the bottom scroll 
button scrolls down to view information below the viewing area, and 
pressing the top scroll button scrolls up to view the information 
above the viewing area. The scroll buttons also enable you to 
navigate between records in an application and to adjust the volume 
during a call. 

8. Application buttons: Activates the applications that correspond to 
the icons on the buttons: PhoneBook, Date Book Plus, Blazer, and 
Memo. See page 190 for details on reassigning these buttons to 
activate any application on your phone. You can also use these 
buttons in combination with Option Q to activate other 
applications. See Section 4 in this guide for details. 



6 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Hp: If your phone screen is turned off, pressing any application button 
turns on and opens the corresponding application. 



9. Keyboard: Enables: you to type letters, numbers and symbols on 
your phone. See Section 2 to learn how to enter information. 

10. Phone screen: Displays the applications and information stored in 
your phone. It is touch-sensitive and responds to the stylus. 

Locating top panel controls 



1. Antenna 



2. Stylus 




6. LED 



3. Power button 



4. IRport 



5. Ringer switch 



Antenna: Receives and sends wireless communication signals. The 
antenna does not telescope out of your phone. 
Stylus: Serves as the instrument used to tap options on your phone 
screen. To use the stylus, slide the stylus out of the slot, and hold it as 
you would a pen or pencil. 

Power button (!) : Turns your PCS Treo 300 and wireless mode on 
and off, and controls the keyboard backlight. See page 10 for details. 
IR port: Uses infrared technology to transmit data to and receive data 
from other Palm OS devices. See the section that begins on page 78 
for details. You can also use the IR port to update the information 
between your phone and computer using HotSync technology. See 
the section that begins on page 219 for details. 
Ringerswitch % tf] z : Controls the ringer setting. See page 211 for 
details on changing the settings. 



Note: Silencing the ringer turns off all system sounds, including alarms. 
When you silence the ringer, Date Book Plus alarms vibrate. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



6. LED: Provides status information for your PCS Treo 300 based on the 
color of the light and the blink state. 
No light: Wireless mode off 
Solid:Connected to travel charger 

Green = Fully charged 

Red = Charging 
Blinking:Wireless mode on 

Green = In coverage area 

Red = Out of coverage area 
Double-blink red: Low battery 

Locating back panel components 



1. Electronic 
Serial 
Number - 




2. Reset 
button 



3. Charger and 
USB/serial 
connector 



1. Electronic Serial Number (ESN): Uniquely identifies your phone to 
the PCS network. During the activation process, you are prompted to 
provide this number. 

2. Reset button: Under normal use, you should not have to use the 
reset button. See Section 9 for information about when and how to 
use the reset button. 

3. Charger and USB/serial connector: The connector that connects 
your phone to the travel charger and HotSync cable. The HotSync 
cable connects to a USB port or serial port on your computer and 
enables you to synchronize the information between your phone and 
computer using HotSync technology. 



8 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Charging the battery 

To use your phone, you must connect the travel charger or the HotSync 
cable and charge the battery. When you're near your computer, connect 
your phone to the HotSync cable with the travel charger connected to a 
wall outlet as shown in the section that begins on page 19- When 
travelling, connect the travel charger cable directly to your phone as 
shown in this section. 

When wireless mode is on, a fully charged battery provides approximately 
2.5 hours of talk time or 150 hours of standby time. When wireless mode 
is off, a fully charged battery provides approximately one week of use in 
handheld mode. 

If the battery drains to the point where your phone does not turn on, it 
stores your data safely for about three days. Therefore, we recommend 
that you charge the battery daily to avoid potential data loss. See Section 
9 for tips on extending the life of the battery. 

To charge the battery with the travel charger: 

1 . Plug the travel charger into a wall outlet. 

2. With the word "UP" facing up (as shown) , connect the travel 
charger cable to the charger connector on the bottom of your phone. 




Tip: The LED is solid red while your phone charges. When the LED turns 
solid green, your phone is charged. It takes approximately 2 hours to 
charge a fully drained battery. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Turning your PCS Treo 300 on and off 

Your PCS Treo 300 has two operating modes: a handheld mode and a 
wireless mode. You can turn the handheld mode and the wireless mode 
on and off independent of each other. When you turn on the handheld 
mode, you can use organizer applications such as Date Book Plus and To 
Do List. When you turn on the wireless mode, you can make or receive 
calls. You can also turn both modes on at the same time. When both the 
handheld and wireless modes are on, you can use the organizer 
applications as well as send and receive calls. 

To turn handheld mode on and off, do any of the following: 

* Open the lid to turn it on, or close the lid to turn it off. 

». Press the power button. 

► Press and release the rocker switch. 

». Press any application button on the front of your phone. 

To turn wireless mode on and off: 

Press and hold the power button until you hear the confirmation 
tones and the Sprint banner appears. The ascending tone indicates 
wireless mode is now on and the descending tone indicates wireless 
mode is now off. 

Using the keyboard backlight 

If you have difficulty seeing your phone keyboard in dark environments, 
you can use the backlight to illuminate the keyboard. 

Note: When you turn on the keyboard backlight, the screen brightness 
automatically dims to conserve battery power. If you have difficulty seeing 
the screen in well-lit environments, be sure the keyboard backlight is off 
and adjust the display settings. See page 5 for details. 



To turn the keyboard backlight on and off: 

k Press the power button twice in quick succession. 

Backlight tips: 

k The backlight dims when a call is in progress and you do not press 
any buttons or tap your phone screen for more than 30 seconds. 



10 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



The backlight also turns off automatically (after a period of 
inactivity) with the Auto-off feature. See page 196 for details. 



Adjusting the display 

Depending on the lighting conditions or temperature of the environment 
where you use your phone, you may need to adjust the brightness and 
color saturation of the display. 

The Adjust Display dialog box contains two sliders. The upper slider 
adjusts color saturation and the lower slider adjusts brightness. The 
display usually looks best at maximum brightness but you may want to 
decrease the brightness to conserve battery power. 

To adjust the display: 

1. Press Option (_ >. 

2. Type the letter Q. 



Rdjust Display 0 



Shapes 



Color saturation slider 
Brightness slider 



Rdjust the contrast until you 
can see all three shapes. 



G 



[ Done ] 



3. Press the scroll buttons, or drag the top slider, to adjust the color 
saturation until you can see the three shapes as distinctly as possible. 

4. Hold Option Q and press the scroll buttons, or drag the bottom 
slider, to adjust the screen brightness 



Tip: You can also tap to the left or right of the sliders to fine tune the 
display settings. 



5. Press Space 



to finish. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Using the stylus to get things done 

Like using a mouse to click elements on a computer screen, using the 
stylus to tap elements on your phone screen is a way to get things done 
on your phone. 

The first time you start your phone, setup instructions appear on the 
screen. These instructions include a calibration screen, or digitizer. 
Calibration aligns the internal circuitry of your phone with its touch- 
sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen, the 
phone can detect exactly which task you want to perform. 



Important: Always use the point of the stylus for tapping the phone 
screen. Never use an actual pen, pencil, or other sharp object to tap the 
phone screen. 

With your phone turned on, you can tap the phone screen to perform 
many operations, such as the following: 

► Open applications 
Choose menu commands 

► Select options in dialog boxes 

Just as you can drag the mouse to select text or move objects on your 
computer, you can also drag the stylus to select text. You can also use the 
stylus to drag the slider of any scroll bar. 



12 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Elements of the phone interface 



I Edit Options 



New Memo 
Delete Memo... 
Beam Memo ^B 



irn pie men ted by; empjcij;ees. 



M j c he j e Bgk er to r epor t. on 

i £ an ding r io. I in "hi L'allo: 

Fort Worth area. 



[ Done) [ Details ] 



1. Menu bar 



_2. Command buttons 



3. Pick list 



4. Check box 



Week Preferences 



Time Format: v11p 
Display To Do: 'w Top 
WeekStart: t Man 



J 



[vf Wordwrap Single Entry 

□ Hide Untinned Floating Event: 

□ Shaw Journal 

□ Include Week Number: in Title 



( OK ] [ Cancel"] 



Menu bar: A set of commands that are specific to the application. 
Not all applications have a menu bar. 
Command buttons: Tap a button to perform a command. 
Command buttons appear in dialog boxes and at the bottom of 
application screens. 

Pick list: Tap the arrow to display a list of choices, and then tap an 
item in the list to select it. 

Check box: When a check mark appears in a check box, the 
corresponding option is active. If a check box is empty, tapping it 
inserts a check mark. If a check box is checked, tapping it removes 
the check mark. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 




Hdams, Becky 1 -800-S5S-2222 W 
Alfonso, Maria E5E-1616H 
Barker, Todd S5S-1234W 



Francois, Michelle +33 (0) 100 15 

Hienrich, Karen E5E-2367W 

Lornbordi, C3ina E5E-9696 H 

Manicotti, Bill 408-555-6000 W 

Martinez, Jose 41 5-S5S-88 W W 

Morn & Dad E5E-7777W 

Morn & Dad E5E-1133H 



1. Previous/next 
arrows 



Look Up: J 



fHdd"] [Ca^eT] ^ 




2. Scrollbar 



Select the conduits to run 
during Modern HotSunc. 



pifflddress 

[^Applications 

FiTBIazer 

ercaic 

F*T<jtyTirne 
[if Dote Book+ 
F*TExpense 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



1 . Previous/next arrows: Tap the up and down arrows to display the 
previous and next page of information; tap the left and right arrows 
to display the previous and next record. 

2. Scroll bar: Roll the rocker switch or press the scroll buttons on the 
front panel of your phone to scroll to the previous and next pages. To 
scroll the display one line at a time, tap the top or bottom arrow. 

You can also scroll by dragging the slider or by tapping the scroll bar 
just above or below the slider to scroll to the previous or next page. 

Moving around the screen 

You can move between entry fields, pick lists, check boxes, and other 
options by using the stylus, the scroll buttons, or the rocker switch. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring® Treo™ 300 



To move around the screen do one of the following: 

». Tap an item with the stylus. 

». Press the scroll buttons to scroll through the items on the screen. 
». Roll the rocker switch up or down to scroll through the items on the 
screen. 



Hp: To learn how to move around the screen using the PCS Treo 300 
keyboard, see page 28. 



Displaying online tips 

Many of the dialog boxes that appear on your phone contain an online 
Tips icon in the upper-right corner. Online tips anticipate questions you 
have in a dialog box, provide shortcuts for using the dialog box, or give 
you other useful information. 

To display an online tip: 

1. Tap the Tips icon (T). 

2. After you review the tip, hold Option O and press Return \J to 
finish. 



Tips 



" To create a contact that 
always appears at the top of 
the Contacts list, simply 
start the entry with a 
symbol, as in -IF FOUND 
CALL-. The entry can 
contain contact information 
to be used in case your 
handheld computer is lost. 

■ To choose which phone 

[ Done ] ^ 

Customizing your phone 

You can customize your phone by using the Preferences application. You 
can enter personal information such as your name and address; change 
the time and date; view different date and time formats when you travel; 
turn off sounds; configure your phone to work with a modem or network, 
and select ringer settings. See Section 7 for more information on 
customizing your phone. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Contact Entry Details © 



Category: t Business 
Private: □ 

[ OK ] [ Cancel) [Delete...] [Note] 



To open the Preferences screens: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu C^m to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the Preferences icon 

3. Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. 

4. Tap the Preferences category you want to view. 

The following procedures for setting the time and date give you an 
example of how to customize your phone. You make changes to the time 
and date in General preferences. 

To automatically set the current date and time: 

1 . Turn on wireless mode. See page 10 for details. 

2. Tap the Set Time box. 



Preferences 


t General 






Set Time: 


I 5:56 pm 1 


Set Date: 


i 7/24/02; 


Huto-off after: 


t 2 minutes 


System Sound: 


t Medium 


Rlarm Sound: 


t Medium 


Game Sound: 


t Medium 


Beam Receive: 


t On 



-Tap here 



Set Current Time 



□ Automatic Network Time: 
111 : | 1 | 9 | ^ | RM Ufll 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



3. Tap the Automatic Network Time check box to use the PCS 

network date and time. 



Note: Your phone synchronizes the date and time when wireless mode is 
on and you are inside a coverage area. You can also display time based on 
a 24-hour clock. See page 195 for details. 



4. Hold Option £ and press Return \j to finish. 

To manually set the current time: 

1 . Tap the Set Time box. 



16 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Preferences | 


t General 






Set Time: 


I 5:56 prn j 


Set Date: 




Huto-off after: 


t 2 minutes 


System Sound: 


t Medium 


Rlarm Sound: 


t Medium 


Game Sound: 


t Medium 


Beam Receive: 


» On 



-Tap here 



Set Current Time 



□ Automatic Network Time: 
ID I 1 h I i | RM |J|I|| 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



2. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour. 

3. Tap each minute number, and then tap the arrows to change them. 

4. Tap AM or PM 

Note: Your phone can also display time based on a 24-hour clock. See 
page 195 for details. 

5. Hold Option ._ and press Return Q to finish. 

To manually set the current date: 

1. Tap the Set Date box. 

2. Hold Option C ' and press a scroll button to scroll to the current year. 



4 2002 H 



| Jan | Feb 


Mar 


Apr 


May 


Jun 


Q Rug 


Sep 


Oct 


Nov 


Dec 



S IY1 T W T F S 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

M 15 16 17 18 19 20 

21 22 23 SB 25 26 27 

28 29 30 31 



Cancel] (Today 



-Tap arrows to select year 
-Tap to select month 

—Tap to select date 



3. Hold Shift Grid and press a scroll button to scroll to the current 
month. 

4. Type the number for the current date. 

5. Press Space c^iil to select the date. 



Tip: You can also select the date by tapping the screen as shown above. 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Using the headset 

You can connect a headset for hands-free operation. Your PCS Treo 300 is 
compatible with the included headset and other headsets listed at 
www.sprintpcs.com. If you need to use your phone while driving and this 
is permitted in your area, we recommend using a headset. 

Note: PCS Treo 300 is not compatible with three-pin (also called three- 
pole) style headsets. You can determine whether a headset is a three-pin 
headset by counting the number of silver rings on the headset pin. Athree- 
pin headset has two rings. 



To use the headset: 

1 . Connect the headset plug to the headset j ack on the side of your 
phone. 



2. Place the speaker in your ear. 

3. Press the headset button to perform any of the following functions: 

> Answer an incoming call (including an incoming call waiting call) . 

> Switch between two active calls. 

Place the second call on hold when you have two active calls. 

> Hang up an active call. 




Microphone 



18 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Connecting the HotSync cable 

The HotSync cable that comes with your PCS Treo 300 enables you to 
charge your phone battery and to synchronize the information on your 
phone using HotSync technology. 



Note: If your computer does not have a USB port, or it uses Windows 95 or 
Windows NT, you need a serial HotSync cable to connect to your 
computer. You can purchase a serial HotSync cable from 
www.sprintpcs.com. 



To connect the HotSync cable: 

1 . Connect the travel charger cable to the short end of the Hotsync 
cable. Be sure to match the sides of the connectors labeled "UP." 

2. Connect the USB HotSync cable to a USB port on your computer, or 
connect the Serial HotSync cable to a Serial port on your computer. 

3. Connect the long end of the HotSync cable to your phone with the 
button facing up. 




Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 




Note: If you are unsure about the exact location of the USB port or serial 
port on your computer, refer to the manual supplied with the computer. 

4. Plug the travel charger into a wall outlet. 



Tip: The travel charger does not need to be plugged into a wall outlet to 
perform a HotSync operation. However, if you want to use the HotSync 
cable to charge your phone, you must plug the travel charger into a wall 
outlet. 



Using desktop software 

When you use desktop software with HotSync technology, you can do any 
of the following: 

». Work with your phone applications on your computer. Most desktop 
software applications duplicate many of the applications on your 
phone, so you can view, enter, and modify most of the data stored on 
your phone. 

». Back up and synchronize data between your phone and your 

computer. Synchronization is a one-step procedure that ensures that 
changes you make on your phone or desktop software appear in both 
places. See the section that begins on page 76 for details. 



20 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



»- Import and export data, so you can easily transfer data from other 
desktop applications into many of your applications. See the section 
that begins on page 32 for details. 

». Print data from your desktop software on any printer. 

Using your phone with Palm Desktop software 

Your phone comes with Palm Desktop software. Palm Desktop software 
includes many of the same applications as your phone: Date Book, 
Address (the Contacts view in PhoneBook), To Do List, Memo Pad, 
Expense, and desktop e-mail connectivity. 

The following instructions guide you through installing Palm Desktop 
software. After installation, refer to the online Help in Palm Desktop 
software for information about how to use the software. 



Note: You must install the software that comes with your PCS Treo 300 
even if you already installed Palm Desktop software for a previous Palm 
OS handheld. 

To ensure a safe and uninterrupted installation of Palm Desktop 
software, please do not simply copy the Palm Desktop software files to 
your computer's hard disk. You must use the installer to place the files in 
their proper locations and to decompress the files. 

To install Palm Desktop software: 

1 . Connect the HotSync cable. See page 19 for instructions. 

2. Exit any open programs, including those that run at startup such as 
Microsoft Office, and disable any virus-scanning software. 

3. Insert the Handspring CD-ROM into the computer's CD-ROM drive. 

4. If the language selection screen appears, click the same language 
you selected on your phone. Choosing a different language may 
result in loss of data. 

5. If the model selection screen appears, click the name of the product 
you purchased. 

6. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation. 

When the set up process is done, the installation screen closes 
automatically. 

Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



Using your phone with Microsoft Outlook 

The software that comes with your PCS Treo 300 includes everything you 
need to synchronize your phone with Microsoft Outlook. If you already 
have Microsoft Outlook installed on your computer, the installation 
program prompts you to choose the Microsoft Outlook synchronization 
option. 

Using your phone with another PIM 

If you prefer to use another personal information manager (PIM) , such 
as Lotus Notes, you can use it if third-party connection software, called a 
conduit, is available for your PIM. You must install the software that 
came with your PCS Treo 300 along with the conduit for your PIM to 
synchronize the data between your phone and your PIM. For information 
on conduit software, go to this web site: www.sprintpcs.com. 

Using an e-mail application with your phone 

Your phone comes with the Palm Mail e-mail application. Palm Mail is a 
synchronization based e-mail application. Each time you synchronize 
with your computer, Palm Mail retrieves new messages from your desktop 
e-mail application and sends any new messages you created on your 
phone. 

To install Palm Mail: 

». Select Mail Setup under Programs/Handspring (or Palm) on the 

Windows Start menu. 



22 



Section 1 

Introduction to Your PCS Phone Handspring 8 Treo™ 300 



2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 

This chapter explains how to enter data into your PCS Phone 
Handspring" Treo™ 300 using each of the following methods: 

► Using the PCS Treo 300 keyboard 
». Using the onscreen keyboard 

► Using your computer keyboard 
». Importing data 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Using the PCS Treo 300 keyboard 

The PCS Treo 300 keyboard is the primary method you'll use to enter 
data into your phone. Each letter key on the keyboard has three 
functions: 

». Normal: Types a lowercase letter. 
». Shift: Types an uppercase letter. 

». Option: Types the number/symbol, or activates the function, that 
appears in blue on the key. 



Typing capital letters 

To type capital letters, you must first "shift" to caps and then type the 
character. 

Note: Your phone includes a feature that automatically capitalizes the first 
letter when you create a new sentence or a new record (by tapping New 
or a blank line). 

To type a single capital letter (Caps Shift): 

1. Press Shift cs>: 

When Caps Shift is active, an "up arrow" symbol appears in the 
lower-right corner of the PCS Treo 300 screen. If you accidentally 
activate Caps Shift, press Shift csi twice to cancel it, or if you do 
nothing for five seconds, it reverts to lowercase. 

[ Details ] t | Caps Shift 

2. Type the letter you want to capitalize. 



Space 



Option - 
Shift/Find 




24 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



To enter only capital letters (Caps Lock): 

1. Press Shift <3> twice. 

When Caps Lock is active, an underlined "up arrow" symbol appears 
in the lower-right corner of the phone screen. 

(Details) * I Caps Lock 

2. Type the text you want to capitalize. 

3. Press Shift cSi to turn off Caps Lock. 

Typing numbers and symbols 

Typing numbers and symbols with your phone is similar to typing 
symbols on a computer keyboard. You must first "shift" to option mode 
and then type the number or symbol strokes. 

To enter a single number or symbol (Option Shift): 

1. Press Option O- 

When Option Shift is active, a dot appears in the lower-right corner of 
the PCS Treo 300 screen. If you accidentally activate Option Shift, 
press Backspace ^ to cancel it. 

[ Detail;) > | Option Shift 

2. Press the key where the number or symbol appears in blue. 

To enter only numbers or symbols (Option Lock): 

1. Press Option O twice. 

2. Press the keys where the numbers or symbols appear in blue. 
When Option Lock is active, an underlined dot appears in the lower- 
right corner of the PCS Treo 300 screen. 

( Details ) j | Option Lock 

3. Press Option to turn off Option Lock. 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Typing accented characters 

The ListType feature enables you to enter accented characters. You can 
enter the following accented letters: 

aaaaaageeeeifi'inooooouuuuyy 
To enter accented characters: 

1 . Type the letter (uppercase or lowercase) to which you want to add an 
accent. 

2. Press ListType & . 

3. Use the scroll buttons to select the accent you want to apply. 

4. Press Space to insert the accented character. 

Tip: You can also select the accented character you want to insert by 
repeatedly pressing ListType \j . 



Typing extended characters 

The ListType feature also enables you to enter many extended characters 
that are not on the keyboard, such as currency symbols and emoticons. 
Extended characters are often found under related characters. For 
example, the £ symbol is located under $. 

To enter extended characters: 

1 . Position the cursor where you want to insert the extended character. 

2. Type the base character associated with the extended character you 
want to insert: 



Tip: To view a list of available accented and symbol characters, press 
Menu go?* and under Edit select Keyboard Help (/G). 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Base character Symbols Base character Symbols 

a s T _ tm -j- 

A M x x 



M 



t 



t* 



x 



b g y ¥ 

c t © a - Y ¥ 

C 4© A " 0 % 0 ° 

d ft 1 ^ 

D fP 2 2 

e ^ 3 3 

E € . ?!... 

«/.,., 

F / ! i 

1 £ ? i 

L £ ; :-) :-( ;-) :-D 

m p ' " < > ~" 



o 0 $ €i¥ 

0 0 + & 

p u - — 

p II / \*i 

r ® % % 0 

R ® # 

fis§ ( <[{< 

S fiS§ ) >]}> 



3. Press Listiype *J . 

4. Use the scroll buttons to select the extended symbol you want to 
insert. 

5. Press Space C^«B to insert the extended character. 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Tip: To enter a tab, press Shift c^> and then press Space 



Navigation keystrokes 

In addition to character symbols, your phone includes special keystrokes 
that you can use to navigate within text or fields in your applications. 



Note: Some applications may not support these navigation keystrokes. 



Command 


Keystrokes 


Move cursor right 


Hold Option . while pressing the bottom scroll button. 


Move cursor left 


Hold Option Q while pressing the top scroll button. 


Previous field 


Press the top scroll button. 


Next field 


Press the bottom scroll button. 


Affirm an action 


Hold Option Q and press Return *J . Use these keys 
instead of tapping the following onscreen buttons: OK, 
Done, Yes, Next, Accept, Send, and Dial. 


Annul an action 


HoldOption O andpressBackspace ^ .Use these keys 
instead of tapping the following onscreen buttons: 
Cancel, No, Previous, and Reject. 


Open or dial die selected item 


Press Space or press Return 0 . 



Using menus 

Menus on your phone are easy to use. Once you have mastered them in 
one application, you can use them the same way in all other 
applications. 

The menus and menu commands that are available depend on the 
application. Also, the menus and menu commands vary depending on 
which part of the application you're using. For example, in Memo Pad, 
the menus are different for the Memo list screen and the Memo edit 
screen. 

The menus of each application are illustrated in the section on that 
application in Section Chapter 6. The Edit menu is described in the 
section that begins on page 59- 

Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



To use the menu bar: 

1 . Open an application (such as Memo Pad) . 

2. Press Menu to open the menu bar. 



Hp: You can also open the menu bar by tapping the inverted tab atthe top 
of any application's screen (except Calculator). 



Inverted 

tab, 



[^^^^ Friit Options 
New Memo 
Delete Memo... 
Beam Memo 

iri-ipkrriirifi'j l<_. ernpki a: 

Ui<:hd~ Eal t* h spat ; ;;n 
expanding nwkeU in the DaNas - 

Fo.r.LWorthareq. 



[Done] [ Details ] 

In this example, three menus are available: Record, Edit, and Options. 
The Record menu is selected and contains the commands New Memo, 
Delete Memo, and Beam Memo. 

3. Press the top scroll button to switch between menus. 

4. Press the bottom scroll button to select a command within a menu. 

5. Press Space ^^^B to run the selected command. 

Tip: To close the menus without running a command, press Menu r^a 
again. 



Keyboard shortcut menu commands 

Most menu commands have an equivalent keyboard shortcut. The 
shortcut letters appear to the right of the menu command names. 
Throughout this guide, the shortcut letters appear in parentheses (/C) 
next to menu selection instructions. 



[Done] [ Details ] 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Menu commands 



firm 


Undo 




Cut 




Copy 


sc 


Paste 


SP 


Select nil 


ss 


Keyboard 
Graffiti Help 


✓G 



-Shortcut letters 



To use keyboard shortcuts for menu commands: 

1. Press Menu ffpa» to open the menu bar. 

2. Type the menu command shortcut letter. 

For example, to choose Copy in the Edit menu, press Menu 
followed by the letter "c." 

Tip: When the menu bar is open, you can enter a shortcut letter for any 
menu item in the current application view, not just the ones that appear on 
the current menu. 



Using text Shortcuts 

Shortcuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and 
easy. Shortcuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some 
word processors. 

Your phone comes with several predefined Shortcuts, and you can also 
create your own. Each Shortcut can represent up to 45 characters. For 
example, you might create a Shortcut for your name, or for the header of 
a memo. See the section that begins on page 213 to learn about creating 
your own Shortcuts. 

Your phone includes the following predefined Shortcuts: 



Entry 


Shortcut 


Date stamp 


ds 


Time stamp 


ts 


Date / time stamp 


dts 


Meeting 


me 


Breakfast 


br 


Lunch 


lu 


Dinner 


di 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



To use a Shortcut: 

1. Type the letter s. 

2. Press ListType Q. 

3. Use the scroll buttons to select the Shortcut symbol . 



Note: The Shortcut symbol appears by the cursor to show that you are in 
Shortcut mode. 



4. Type the Shortcut characters. 

Using the onscreen keyboard 

You can open the onscreen keyboard anytime you need to enter text or 
numbers on your phone. When used in conjunction with the backlight, 
the onscreen keyboard is especially useful for typing in the dark. 

To use the onscreen keyboard: 

1 . Open a record in an application that requires you to enter data (such 
as Memo Pad). 

2. Press Menu gpa. 

3. Under Edit, select Keyboard (/K). 

4. Tap the characters to enter text, numbers, and international 
characters. 



Tab 



Caps lock 



Caps shift 



q | w | h | r | 1 1 y | u | i | n | p | 



+1 1 a | ; | d | f | g | h | j | k | I 



cap | z | x | c | v | b | n | m| 



shift 



jpace 



- / 



[ Done ] 



^3 



123 Int'l 



-Backspace 
-Carriage return 



Tap here to display 
alphabetic keyboard 





1 


2 


3 




% 




£ 


¥ 




+ 




4 


5 


6 


I 


] 


{ 


} 


/ 






< 


> 


\ 




7 


8 


9 












& 


# 


( 


0 


) 


jpace |% 


[ Done ] 


abcjffi Int'l 





Tap here to display 
numeric keyboard 



d|d|d|d|d|d|ae| 


f | fi | jff | ^ 


+1 1 e | e | e | e | \\ i 


i | T | (i | y | y 


nap |d|d|d|d|a|u 


| u | u | u 1 


shift | jpace 


1 1 1 * 


( Done ] |abc|l23[ 


m 







international keyboard 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Note: The onscreen keyboard also includes a dialog box for international 
characters. You can switch among the three dialogs at any time to enter 
the exact text you need. 



5. After you finish, tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place 
the text in the record. 

Using your computer keyboard 

Many of the applications on your phone are available in Palm Desktop 
software and in most Personal Information Manager (PIM) applications. 
If you have a lot of data to enter, or prefer to use the computer keyboard, 
you can use Palm™ Desktop software, or any supported PIM such as 
Microsoft Outlook, to enter information. You can then perform a 
HotSync"' operation to synchronize the information on your computer 
with the information on your phone. See the section that begins on page 
76 for details on HotSync operations. 

Refer to Palm Desktop online Help or the documentation that came with 
your PIM software for more information on entering data on your 
computer. 

Importing data 

If you have data stored in computer applications such as spreadsheets 
and databases, or if you want to import data from another Palm OS " 
handheld, you can transfer the data to your phone without having to key 
it in manually. Save the data in one of the file formats listed below, 
import it into Palm Desktop software, and then perform a HotSync 
operation to transfer the data to your phone. 

Palm Desktop software can import data in the following file formats: 

». Comma delimited (xsv, .txt) : Address and Memo Pad only 

». Tab delimited (.tab, .tsv, .txt) : Address and Memo Pad only 

► CSV (Lotus Organizer 2.x/97 Mapping) : Address only 

». vCal (.vcs) Date Book only 

». vCard (.vcf) Address only 

». Date Book archive (.dba) 

». Address archive (.aba) 



32 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



». To Do List archive (.tda) 
Memo Pad archive (.mpa) 

Archive formats can only be used with Palm Desktop software. Use the 
archive file formats to share information with other people who use Palm 
OS handhelds or to create a copy of your important Palm Desktop 
information. 

To import data: 

1 . Open Palm Desktop software. 

2. Click the application into which you want to import data. 

3. If you are importing records containing a field with category names, 
select All in the Category box. 

Be sure that the same categories that appear in the imported file also 
exist in the application. If the categories do not exist, create them 
now; otherwise, the records are imported into the Unfiled category. 

4. From the File menu, select Import. 

5. Select the file you want to import. 

6. Click Open. 

7. To import data into the correct Palm Desktop fields, drag fields in the 
left-hand column so that they are opposite the corresponding 
imported field on the right. 

8. If you do not want to import a field, deselect the check box for that 
field. 

9. Click OK. 

The imported data is highlighted in the application. 

10. To add the imported data to your phone, perform a HotSync 
operation. 

See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and 
exporting data. 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



Section 2 

Entering Data in Your Phone 



3 

Managing Your Applications 

This chapter explains how to switch between applications on your PCS 
Phone Handspring* Treo™ 300, how to change application settings 
so they are personalized to your work methods, and how to categorize 
applications so you view them in related groups. 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



35 



Using the Applications Launcher 

Your phone is equipped with a variety of applications. All the applications 
installed on your phone appear in the Applications Launcher. 

Opening applications 

You can use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed 
on your phone. You can also open the four main applications — 
PhoneBook, Date Book Plus, Blazer" , and Memo Pad — with the 
application buttons on the front panel of your phone. 



Tip: When you press an application button on the front panel of your 
phone, you have instant access to the selected application. You don't even 
need to turn on your phone first. 



In addition to providing a way for you to open applications, the 
Applications Launcher displays the current time, battery level, wireless 
signal status, and application category. 

To open an application: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu fpat to access the 
Applications Launcher. 



t Fill I 




Blazer dak CityTime 

& ® €) 

Date Book+ Expense HotSync 

Q ® © 

Memo Pad Phone Book Prefs 

m & © 

Security SMS To Do List 



2. Tap the icon of the application that you want to open. To see 
additional applications, press the scroll buttons. 



Tip: To find an application quickly, you can type the first letter of its name. 
The Applications Launcher scrolls to the first application with a name that 
begins with that letter. You can also create categories and organize your 
applications by category. See page 37 for details. 



36 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



Switching between applications 

When working in any application, press Option and then press Menu 
, or press an application button on the front panel of your phone 
to switch to another application. Your phone automatically saves your 
work in the current application and displays it when you return to that 
application. 

Categorizing applications 

The category feature enables you to manage the number of application 
icons that appear onscreen in the Applications Launcher. You can assign 
an application to a category and then display a single category or all 
your applications. 

To categorize an application: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu csst to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Press Menu again to open the menus. 

3. Under App, select Category (/Y). 

4. Tap the pick list next to each application to select a category. 



Category 0 



Blazer * Unfiled 

Calc T Main 

CityTirne T Main 

Date Book* » Main 

Expense T Main 

HotSync T System 

Memo Pad T Main 

PhoneBaak T Main 

Prefs T System 

Security T System 

[ Done ] 



Tip: To create a new category, tap Edit Categories from the pick list. Tap 
New, enter the category name. Hold Option and press Return Q twice 
to add the category. 



5. Hold Option O and press Return Q to finish. 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



To display applications by category: 

1. Press Option 0 and then press Menu csm to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Do one of the following: 

■ Hold Option Q and press Menu figst repeatedly to cycle through 
all your categories. 

■ Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen and select the 
category you want to display. 

Changing the Applications Launcher display 

By default, the Applications Launcher displays each application as an 
icon. As an alternative, you can choose to show a list of applications. You 
can also choose to view the same category of applications each time you 
open the Applications Launcher. 

To change the Applications Launcher display: 

1. Press Option O and then press Menu traai to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Press Menu r^a again to open the menus. 

3. Under Options, select Preferences)/!?). 

4. Tap the View By pick list and select List. 

5. Hold Option C and press Return \J to finish. 



3:23 pinH 




T fill | 


& Blazer 




Cole 


® CityTime 


DateBook+ 


$ Expense 


<D 


HotSync 


Memo Pod 




PhoneEook 


iz Profs 


O-w 


Security 


sill; sms 




To Do List 


[S] Welcome 







To open the Applications Launcher to the last opened category: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu cszi to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Press Menu again to open the menus. 

3. Under Options, select Preferences (/R). 

Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



4. Tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it. 

5. Hold Option C and press Return Q to finish. 

Choosing preferences 

You can set options that affect an entire application in the application's 
Preferences dialog box. 

To change preferences for an application: 

1. Open an application. 

2. Press Menu tfi pi. 

3. Under Options, select Preferences (/R). 



Note: Not all applications have a Preferences command. 

4. Make changes to the settings. 

5. Hold Option C and press Return >J to finish. 

Installing and removing applications 

This section explains how to install and remove applications on your 
phone and how to remove Palm™ Desktop software from your 
computer. 

Installing add-on applications 

Your phone comes with the PhoneBook, Date Book Plus, Blazer, Memo 
Pad, To Do List, SMS, Expense, Calculator, and CityTime applications 
installed and ready to use. 

You can also install additional applications on your phone, such as 
business applications, games, and other software. The Install Tool makes 
it easy to install software on your phone during a HotSync 8 operation. 
There are a variety of third-party applications available for devices that 
use Palm OS software. To learn more about these applications, go to the 
web site: www.sprintpcs.com. 

When you download an add-on application from the Internet, it is 
probably in a compressed format such as a .zip or .sit file. If you have a 
decompression utility on your computer, use it to decompress the .pre 
and .pdb files inside the compressed file. If you do not have a 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



decompression utility, search the Internet using phrases like 'zip 
decompression' or 'how to unzip'. This will lead you to various third- 
party utilities that you can use to decompress any kind of compressed or 
downloaded file-not just add-ons for your phone. After you install the 
utility, you are ready to decompress the add-on application files that you 
downloaded. 



Note: Any applications that you install on your phone resides in RAM 
memory; you can delete them at anytime. 



To install add-on software on your phone: 

1 . Copy or download the application you want to install into the add-on 
folder in your Handspring (or Palm) directory on your computer. 



Note: If the software you download is compressed, you need to 
decompress it into this folder. If you prefer to place the application into 
another folder, you need to navigate to that folder before you complete 
step 5. 



2. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your desktop. 




40 



3. Click Install. 
Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



Tip: You can also access the Install Tool dialog box by selecting Install 
Tool under Sprint on the Start menu, or by double-clicking any file with a 
PRC file extension. 



| Midline 



ril=[.T| listed below will be mstsllsd on your handheld the next 
Liri'iir you perform a HotSyrv:- >i>pei iii>i>n: 



rTips:- 



Find other applicatonsto install onyour handheld ot 
http: //www. nan ds pri ng com 

The 'Add" button locks lirst in the \ADD-ON lolder inside 
your C:\PR0GPAM FIL£S\PALM (older. Thistolder is a 
convenient place to stare downloaded handheld files. 



4. In the User drop-down list, select the name that corresponds to your 
phone. 

5. Click Add. 



[*] Giraffe. pre 
[*| Hardball pre 
I*) Minehuntprc 
[5) Puzzle. pre 
■ @) Subhunt.prc 



File name: 
Files of type: 



Open 



6. Select the application (s) that you want to install on your phone. 

7. Click Open. 



Note: Review the list of applications you selected in the Install Tool dialog 
box. If you do not want to install an application, select it, and then click 
Remove. (This does not remove the application from your computer; it 
simply removes it from the list of applications to install.) 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



8. Click Done. 

9. Perform a HotSync operation to install the application(s) you 
selected in step 6. See the section that begins on page 76 for details. 

Tip: You can also install an application by simply double-clicking the 
application's icon. 



Removing applications 

In the event that you run out of memory or decide that you no longer 
need an application you installed, you can remove applications from 
your phone. You can remove only add-on applications, patches, and 
extensions that you install; you cannot remove the applications that 
reside in the ROM portion of your phone. 

To remove an add-on application: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu Jjj to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Press Menu again to open the menus. 

3. Under App, select Delete (/D). 

4. Tap the application that you want to remove. 



Delete 


e 


Free Memory: 1 of 1 f. 1 28K 


ll 


1 


Blazer Cache 


BK 




Datebk3HDB 


IK 




Graffiti 


UK 




SMS Messages 


2K 




SMS Msg Index 


IK 




[ Done J [ Delete... ] 





5. Tap Delete. 

6. Hold Option O and press Return \J twice to finish. 

7. Check the Backup folder (under your user name folder in the 
Handspring or Palm folder) on your computer. If you find a PRC file 
for the application you just removed, delete the PRC file from the 
Backup folder. 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



Tip: If you installed Palm Desktop software for the first time when you 
purchased your PCS Treo 300, the Palm Desktop software is located in the 
Handspring folder. If you upgraded from a previous version of Palm 
Desktop software, these files are most likely located in the Palm folder. 



Removing Palm Desktop software 

Removing Palm Desktop software also removes HotSync Manager. If you 
remove this software from your computer, you cannot synchronize your 
data. So, we highly recommend leaving Palm Desktop software on your 
computer. 

To remove Palm Desktop software: 

1 . From the Windows Start menu, choose Programs, Handspring (or 
Palm) and then Uninstall. 

2. Click Yes to uninstall the software. 

Security 

Your phone comes with a Security application so that unauthorized users 
cannot view the entries you wish to protect. To access the Security 
application, you must first select either the All or System category from 
the Applications Launcher. 

Note: The Security Preferences screen in the PhoneBook application 
provides a separate lock for the wireless mode features. The wireless 
mode lock prevents accidental initiation of voice or data calls. When 
wireless mode is locked, you can still use the handheld mode features 
without unlocking wireless mode. See page 1 1 1 for information on locking 
wireless mode. 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



In Security, you can do the following: 

». Mask or hide entries you define as private. The Mask option displays 
a gray bar over private records, and the Hide option completely 
removes (hides) private records. See the section that begins on page 
72 for more information. 

». Assign a password to the Security viewing options. Assigning a 
password requires you to enter a password to view masked or hidden 
private entries; not assigning a password enables you (or anyone 
else) to view individual masked private entries by tapping them, and 
to view all hidden or masked private entries by selecting Show 
Records in the Security dialog box. 

Assigning a password 

You can assign a password to protect your private records and to lock 
your phone. 

To assign a password: 

1. Press Option O and then press Menu Cjmm to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the Security icon 

3. Tap the Password box. 

4. Enter a password. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return >J . 



Security '^^^^^^■^■^^^^^^1 


Current 
Privacy: 


t Show Records 


Password: 


i -Un assigned- j 


[ Help ) 





Tap 
"here 



Enter a password: 



If you assign a password, you 
must enter it to show private 
records. 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



6. Enter the same password a second time. 

7. Hold Option Q and press Return *J to finish. 



44 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



Changing or deleting a password 

Once you define a password for your phone, you can change or delete it 
at any time. You must enter the current password before you can change 
or delete it. 

To change or delete your password: 

1 . Tap the Password box. 

2. Enter the current password. 



Current 

Privacy: ^ Show Records 



-Assigned-; 



Help ) 



Tap here 



(*$\ Please enter your 
password: 

I 

[OK] [ Lost Password] [ Cancel ] 



3. Hold Option O and press Return Q . 

4. Do one of the following: 

> To change the password, enter the new password, and hold Option i 

and press Return Q . 
• To delete the password, tap Delete. 



Enter new password or tap 
the Delete button to remove 
your current password: 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] [Delete ] 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



Recovering from a forgotten password 

If you did not lock your phone and you forget your password, you can 
delete the password from your phone. Deleting a forgotten password also 
deletes all entries and files marked as Private. 



Important: If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a 
forgotten password, your phone restores your private entries the next time 
you perform a HotSync operation, but it does not restore the password. 



To delete a forgotten password: 

1 . Tap the Password box. 

2. Tap Lost Password. 



Current 

Privacy: ^ Show Records 



Password: -Assigned 



Help ) 



Tap here 



Cj>\ Please enter your 
password: 

I 

[OK] [ Lost Password] [ Cancel ] 



3. Hold Option Q and press Return \j for Yes. 



Section 3 

Managing Your Applications 



4 

Applications Overview 

This chapter briefly describes each application and how to open it. 
Your PCS Phone Handspring* Treo™ 300 comes with these 
applications already installed: 
». PhoneBook 
». Date Book Plus 
Blazer 1 
Memo Pad 

► SMS 

► To Do List 

► CityTime 
». Calculator 

► Expense 



Section 4 
Applications Overview 



PhoneBook 



PhoneBook enables you to make and receive telephone calls, and 
to keep names, addresses, phone numbers, and other 
information about your personal or business contacts. 

In PhoneBook, you can do the following: 

». Store thousands of names, addresses, phone numbers, e-mail 

addresses, and more, in your Contacts list. 
». Create up to 50 speed dial entries. 

». Dial numbers from the Dial Pad, your Speed Dial list, your Contacts 

list, or the Call History list on your phone. 
». Quickly look up, enter, or duplicate names, addresses, phone 

numbers, and other information. 
». Enter up to five phone numbers (home, work, fax, mobile, etc.) or 

e-mail addresses for each name. 
». Attach a note to each Contacts entry, in which you can enter 

additional information about the entry. 
► Assign Contacts entries to categories so that you can organize and 

view them in logical groups. 
». Display a history list of your incoming and outgoing calls. 

To open PhoneBook: 

Press PhoneBook . PhoneBook opens and the Speed Dial view 



Tip: Press PhoneBook <J> repeatedly to cycle through the Speed Dial, 
Dial Pad, Contacts, and Call History views. Press and hold PhoneBook /_) 
to redial the last number you called. 



appears. 




PhoneBook button 



48 



Section 4 

Applications Overview 



Date Book Plus 



RSfe Date Book Plus lets you quickly and easily schedule 

appointments or any kind of activity associated with a date and/ 
or a time. 

In Date Book Plus, you can do the following: 

». Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific 
time and date. 

► Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week to easily spot 
available times and any potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts, or 
display descriptions of your appointments for one or two weeks. 
Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have 
morning, lunch, or afternoon appointments, or display a calendar 
for an entire year. 

► Display a list of both your appointments and your To Do items. 

». Create unscheduled events or To Do items that float from one day to 

the next until you complete them. 
». Create a Daily Journal to track events with automatic time stamps. 
». Set an alarm to sound prior to the scheduled activity, and create 

reminders for events that are based on a particular date, rather than 

time of day, such as birthdays and anniversaries. 
». Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of 

the entiy in your Date Book. 

To open Date Book Plus: 

Press Date Book Plus <3 • Date Book Plus opens to today's 
schedule. 

Date Book Plus button V^^' '~^^^rtf^r 



Hp: Press Date Book Plus repeatedly to cycle through the Day, Week, 
Week with Text, Month, Year, and List views. 



Section 4 
Applications Overview 



Blazer Web Browser 



^r- ^ Blazer is a wireless Internet browser that lets you browse your 
favorite web sites while you're on the go. 



Note: To use Blazer, your service plan must include PCS Vision. 

In Blazer, you can do the following: 

». Access the World Wide Web and display Internet content. 
». Create up to 100 bookmarks for quick and convenient access to your 
favorite web sites. 

Navigate between web pages with familiar toolbar icons. 
To open Blazer: 

». Press Blazer Blazer opens and the Page view appears. 



Blazer button 



Tip: Press Blazer O repeatedly to toggle between the Page and 
Bookmark views. 



50 



Section 4 

Applications Overview 



Memo Pad 



jm% Memo Pad provides a place to take notes that are not associated 
with records in other applications such as Date Book Plus, 
PhoneBook, or To Do List. 

In Memo Pad, you can do the following: 

». Take notes or any kind of message on your phone. 

». Drag and drop memos into popular computer applications like 

Microsoft Word when you synchronize using Palm™ Desktop 

software and HotSync* technology. 
► Assign memos to categories so that you can organize and view them 

in logical groups. 

Take down phone numbers and other types of information. Later, 
you can copy and paste this information to other applications. 

To open Memo Pad: 

». Press Memo Pad cJ> ■ Memo Pad displays the category of memos 
you last viewed. 



Tip: Press Memo Pad repeatedly to cycle through the various categories. 




Memo Pad button 



Section 4 
Applications Overview 



SMS 



SMS provides a way for you to receive short text messages from 
*ys} other people who use mobile phones and subscribe to PCS Vision 
services. 

In SMS, you can do the following: 

». Receive short text messages. 

». Read incoming messages directly from the Inbox. 

». File messages you receive and arrange them by category. 

To open SMS: 

1. Press Option O- 

2. Press PhoneBook . 

SMS.opens and the Inbox view appears. 

Tip: You can also open SMS by tapping the SMS icon -J^s*' in the 
Applications Launcher. 



ffljra •* flu | 

Lisa Best (M) 8: 1 9 pm 

From: 650555523 1 @messaging.spr 
Subject: Don't forget to check out 
the cool Treo accessories at 
www.handsprinq.corn 



Claudia Knight { W) 8: 1 8 pm 



From: 65077733-<H@meS:>aging.spr 
Subject: Hey, I forgot to tell you 
that nny new mobile number i; 
555-4567 

4155558794 (M) 8:16 pin. 



[ Call ] [Delete] 



Section 4 

Applications Overview 



To Do List 



tTo Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize 
the things that you have to do. 

In To Do List, you can do the following: 

». Make a quick and convenient list of things to do. 

»- Assign a priority level to each task. 

»- Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do items. 

► Assign To Do items to categories so that you can organize and view 
them in logical groups. 

► Sort your To Do items either by due date, priority level, or category. 

► Attach notes to individual To Do items for a description or 
clarification of the task. 

To open To Do List: 

1. Press Option Q. 

2. Press Date Book Plus cj> ■ 

Hp: You can also open To Do List by tapping the To Do List icon ^ in the 
Applications Launcher. 



BED 

□ 1 • ill I ••:••!•: 

□ I Ssrid flowsrs to Morn 



[New] [ Details... ] [ Show... ] f 



To Do List displays the category of items you last viewed. 



Section 4 
Applications Overview 



CityTime 



CityTime helps you keep track of the time anywhere around the 
\S9 globe. 

In CityTime, you can do the following: 

Select a home city as a point of reference . 
». Display the day and time in four other cities simultaneously. 
». Add a definition for any city that isn't in the default list. 
». Display sunrise and sunset information for your home city. 

To open CityTime: 

1. Press Option Q . 

2. Press Blazer ^3 ■ 

Tip: You can also open CityTime by tapping the CityTime icon © in the 
Applications Launcher. 




t New York 
We5:18pm 



t Paris 

We 11:1Spm 



▼ Tokyo 
Th 7:18am 



flbberiey 
We 10:18pm 



54 



Section 4 

Applications Overview 



Calculator 



Calculator enables you to perform addition, subtraction, 
multiplication, division and a variety of advanced math and 
scientific calculations. 

In Calculator, you can do the following: 

► Select a view to perform specific types of calculations including: 
math, trigonometry, finance, logic, statistics, weight/temp, length, 
area, and volume. 

Store and retrieve values. 

► Display the last series of calculations, which is useful for confirming 
a series of "chain" calculations. 

► Create a custom view with the buttons you use most often. 

► Switch to basic mode to perform simple calculations. 

To open Calculator: 

1. Press Option C '■ 

2. Press Memo Pad O ■ 



Hp: You can also open Calculator by tapping the Calculator icon ^ in the 
Applications Launcher. 



w Float Degree; 

©C4)(D(6)0© 



Hp: Hold Option and press Memo Pad rj> repeatedly to toggle 
between Basic and Advanced mode. 



Section 4 
Applications Overview 



Expense 



Expense lets you keep track of your expenses and then transfer the 
information to a spreadsheet on your computer. 

In Expense, you can do the following: 

». Record dates, types of expenses, amount spent, payment method, and 

other details associated with any money that you spend. 
». Assign expense items to categories so that you can organize and view 

them in logical groups. 
». Keep track of vendors (companies) and people involved with each 

particular expense. 
». Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category. 
► Sort your expenses by date or expense type. 
». Transfer your expense information to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet 

(version 5.0 or later) on your computer. (Microsoft Excel is not 

included in the PCS Treo 300 package.) 

To open Expense: 

1. Press Option O- 

2. Press Menu gpat . 

3. Tap the Expense icon 



[Expense H 


T Rll 


1/11 Taxi $ 


20.00 


1/11 Lunch $ 


12.75 


1/11 Hotel $ 


98.25 


1/11 Car Rental $ 


127.38 


(New] f Detail;... ) (Show... ) 






56 



Section 4 

Applications Overview 



5 

Common Tasks 

T n addition to the wireless communication applications, your PCS 
1 Phone Handspring" Treo™ 300 also includes a full suite of personal 
information manager (PIM) applications: Date Book Plus, the Contacts 
view in PhoneBook, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Expense. This chapter 
provides instructions on how to do tasks that are common to several 
applications. It's easy to transfer what you learn in one application to the 
other applications because the structure and behavior of all these 
applications are quite similar. 

Throughout this chapter, the term "record" is used to refer to an 
individual item in any of the PIM applications: a single Date Book Plus 
event, Contacts entry in PhoneBook, To Do List item, Memo Pad memo, 
or Expense item. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Creating records 

You can use the following procedure to create a new record in Date Book 
Plus, the Contacts view in PhoneBook, To Do List, Memo Pad, and 
Expense. 

To create a record: 

1 . Open the application in which you want to create a record. 

2. Do one of the following: 

Start entering data (your phone automatically creates a new record) . 



Tip: To create another new record, press the bottom scroll button and 
begin entering data. 

In Date Book Plus and Contacts view in PhoneBook only: Press Menu 
and under Record, select New. . . (/N). 
> Tap New. 

3. In Date Book Plus only: Select start and end times for your event, and 
then hold Option O and press Return \J . 

4. Enter text for the record. 



Note: You do not have to press Shift cz^p to capitalize the first letter of the 
field. Your phone automatically capitalizes the first letter of each field 
(except numeric and e-mail fields). 

5. Use the scroll buttons, roll the rocker switch or tap a field directly to 
move between fields. 

6. (Optional) Tap Details to select attributes for the record. 

7. In Contacts view in PhoneBook only: Hold Option C ' and press 
Return j to finish. 

There's no need to save the record because your phone saves it 
automatically. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Editing records 

After you create a record, you can change, delete, or enter new text at any 
time. Two screen features tell you when your phone is in editing mode: 
». A blinking cursor 
». One or more edit lines 



maa < n □ h i> 



8:00 
9 00 
10:00 
11:00 
12:00, 



2:00, 
3:00, 
1:00, 
E:00, 
6:00, 



Planning team meeting] - 



|:::|;;;|ll||=| [Fg ) [Details"] [Go] 



Blinking cursor 



Edit line 
Entering text 

For information on how to enter text using the keyboard on your phone, 
the onscreen keyboard, or the keyboard attached to your computer, see 
Section 2. 

Edit menu 

The Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text. 
In general, commands available in the Edit menu apply to text that you 
select (or highlight) in an application. 

To select text in an application: 

1 . Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select. 

2. Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it. You can drag across the 
text to select additional words, or drag down to select a group of 
lines. 



Tip: To select a word, double-tap the word. To select a whole line, triple- 
tap the line. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



The following commands may appear in an Edit menu: 



Undo 



Cut 



Copy 



Paste 



Select All 



Keyboard 



Keyboard 
Help 



Reverses the action of the last editcommand.Forexample, if you used 
Cut to remove text, Undo restores the text you removed. Undo also 
reverses deletions done by using backspace. 

Removes the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of 
your phone. You can paste the text you cut into another area of the 
current application or into a different application. 

Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of 
your phone. You can paste the text that you copy into another area of 
the current application or into a different application. 

Inserts the text that you cut or copied at the selected point in a record. 
The textyou paste replaces any selected text. If you did not previously 
cut or copy text, Paste does nothing. 

Selects all of the text in the current record or screen. This enables you 
to cut or copy all of the text and paste it elsewhere. 

Opens the onscreen keyboard. When you finish with the onscreen 
keyboard, hold Option and press Return >j to finish. 

Opens screens that show many keyboard shortcuts and the base 
characters associated with symbols and other extended characters. 
Use this command anytimeyou needforget howtodo somethingwith 
the keyboard. 



Deleting records 

To delete a record in any of the PIM applications: 

1 . Select the record you want to delete. 

2. Press Menu spa . 

3. Under Record, select the Delete command (/D): 
Date Book Plus: Delete Item 

Contacts view in PhoneBook: Delete Contact 
To Do List: Delete Item 
Memo Pad: Delete Memo 
Expense: Delete Item 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



A confirmation dialog box appears. If you want to save a copy of the 
deleted item to an archive file in Palm Desktop software, be sure that 
the check box is checked. If you don't want to save a copy, tap the 
check box to remove the check. 
4. Hold Option c 1 and press Return \j to finish. 

If you choose to save a copy of the selected item, your phone transfers it to 
the archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync 
operation. 

Other ways to delete records 

You can also delete records in the following ways: 

In the Details dialog box of the application, tap Delete, and then 
hold Option C and press Return >J to finish. 
Delete the text of the record. 



Note: In Date Book Plus, if you delete the text of a repeating event, you 
delete all instances of that event. 



Purging records 

Over time, as you use Date Book Plus, To Do List, and Expense, you'll 
accumulate records in these applications that have outlived their 
usefulness. For example, events that occurred months ago remain in the 
Date Book Plus, and To Do items that you marked as completed remain 
in the list, as do Expense items. 

All these outdated records take up memory on your phone, so it's a good 
idea to remove them by using Purge. If you think Date Book Plus or To 
Do List records might prove useful later, you can purge them from your 
phone and save them in an archive file. 

Purging is not available in the Contacts view in PhoneBook or in Memo 
Pad. So you need to delete outdated records from these applications 
individually. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



To purge records: 

1. Open the application. 

2. Press Menu czam . 

3. Under Record, select Purge (/E). 

A confirmation dialog box appears. 

Date Book Plus: Tap the pick list and select how old a record must 
be to be purged. Purge deletes repeating events if the last of the series 
ends before the date that you purge records. 
Date Book Plus, To Do List: If you want to save a copy of the purged 
records to an archive file on your desktop, be sure that the check box 
is checked. If you don't want to save a copy, tap the check box to 
remove the check box. 

4. Hold Option _ and press Return Q to finish. 

If you chose to save a copy of the purged records, your phone transfers 
them to an archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a 
HotSync operation. 



Note: Purging does not happen automatically. You must use the Purge 
command to make it happen. 



Categorizing records 

Categorize records in the Contacts view in PhoneBook, To Do List, Memo 
Pad, SMS, and Expense applications so that they are grouped logically 
and are easy to review. (You can also categorize applications. See page 36 
for details.) 

When you create a record, your phone automatically places it in the 
category that is currently displayed. If the category is All, your phone 
assigns it to the Unfiled category. You can leave an entry as Unfiled or 
assign it to a category at any time. 

System-defined and user-defined categories 

By default, your phone includes system-defined categories, such as All 
and Unfiled, and user-defined categories, such as Business and Personal. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



You cannot modify the system-defined categories, but you can rename 
and delete the user-defined categories. In addition, you can create your 
own user-defined categories. You can have a maximum of 15 user- 
defined categories in each application. 

The Contacts view in PhoneBook contains the QuickList user-defined 
category, in which you can store the names, addresses, and phone 
numbers you might need in emergencies (doctor, fire department, 
lawyer, etc.). 

Expense contains two user-defined categories, New York and Paris, to 
show how you might sort your expenses for different business trips. 



Note: The illustrations in this section come from Memo Pad, but you can 
use these procedures in all the applications in which categories are 
available. Categories are not available in Date Book Plus. 



To move a record into a category: 

1 . Open the record you want to categorize. 

2. In Contacts view in PhoneBook only: Press Menu ^E> , and under 
Record, select Edit Contact (/E). 

3. In the record view, tap the category list to display the list of available 
categories. 

Category list 



1 1/22 fofee'iMia Minulej 



man og erne ri t p rot] r a m as 

' - . ■ imp I 



Micheje Baker to report on 
expanding mar* -t: in the ['alia; - 
Fort Worth area. 



[Done] [ Details ] 



4. Select the category for the record. 



Hp: You can also assign a record to a category by tapping the Details 
button, selecting a category from the category pick list in the Details dialog 
box, and then holding Option and pressing Return J to finish. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



To display a category of records: 

1 . Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the list screen. 



Memo ^| 


r Fill 




EbD 


nil I 


1. Handheld Basics 

2. Three Way; to Enter Text 

3. Download Applications 
A. Power Tip; 




Category 


1. Handheld Basics 

2. Three Way; to E 

3. Download Flpplicc 
A. Power Tip; 


Business 
Per;onal 




pick list 


Unfiled 

Edit Categories... 








[New] 




]New] 





2. Select the category you want to view. 

The list screen now displays only the records assigned to that category. 

To define a new category: 

1 . Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. 



1. Handheld Basics 

2. These Ways to Enter Text 

3. Download Applications 
A. Power Tips 



[New] 



Category 
pick list 



2. Tap Edit Categories. 

3. Tap New. 



1. Handheld Basics 

2. Three Way; to E 

3. Download Flpplicc 
A. Power Tip; 



Fill 

Business 
Per;onal 
Unfiled 



Edit Categories.. 



[New] 



Edit Categories D 



Business 
Personal 
QuickList 



[OK] [ New ] [Rename] [ Delete ] 



4. Enter the name of the new category. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Edit Categories 



Enter a new category name: 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



5. Hold Option C and press Return j twice to finish. 
You can assign any of your records to the new category. 

To rename a category: 

1 . Tap the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. 

2. Tap Edit Categories. 

3. Select the category that you want to rename, and then tap Rename. 



Edit Categories... D 



Personal 
OuickList 



[OK] [ New ] [Rename] [ Delete ] 



4. Enter the new name for the category. 



Edit Categories 



Enter a new category name: 

,', .x\\ 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



5. Hold Option O and press Return ■■J twice to finish. 



Tip: You can group the records in two or more categories into one 
category by giving the categories the same name. For example, if you 
change the name of the Personal category to Business, all records 
formerly in the Personal category appear in the Business category. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Finding records 

Your phone offers several ways to find information quickly: 

». All applications: The Find utility locates any text that you specify, 

always starting with the current application. 
». Date Book Plus, To Do List, Memo Pad: The Phone Number 

Lookup feature displays the Contacts view in PhoneBook and shows 

names and phone numbers for entries that have phone numbers. 

You can add the information that appears in this list to a record. 
». PhoneBook: The Instant Lookup feature lets you scroll immediately 

to a Contacts record in PhoneBook by entering the first few letters of 

a first or last name, or the first name initial and the first few letters of 

a last name. 

Expense: The Lookup feature displays the Contacts in PhoneBook 
that have data in the Company field. You can add these names to a 
list of attendees associated with an Expense record. 

Looking up Contacts records in PhoneBook 

When working with the Contacts view in PhoneBook, the buttons on your 

phone make it easy to navigate among your Contacts entries. 

». In the Contacts list screen, the scroll buttons move the highlight. 
Holding Shift cm and using the scroll buttons moves up or down 
an entire screen of records. If you press and hold a scroll button, you 
accelerate the scrolling and display every third screen. 

» In the Contact View screen, the scroll buttons move to the previous or 
next Contacts record. 

You can also use the Instant Lookup feature, from any of the PhoneBook 
views, to quickly scroll to any of your Contacts entries. 

To use Instant Lookup to find a Contacts record: 

1 . From the Speed Dial, Contacts, or Call History views in PhoneBook, 
enter one of the following for the name you want to find: 

> First name initial and last name. 

> First name 

> Last name 

Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Contacts | 




w All Till 1 
T nM Mil H 


Cadwell, Chris 








1-650 


555-5035 W 




1-650 


555-1701 H 




1-650 


555-6313M 


Cagle, David 








1-212 


883-1515 W 


Malestic, Carols 








1-650 


555-5062 W 




1-115 


555-7625 H 




1 -415 


555-8985 M 


\s\vsm\ 




[New] 



For example, entering a "ca" displays "Chris Cadwell," "David 
Cagle," and "Carolyn Malestic" as shown above. Entering "cmal" 
finds only "Carolyn Malestic." 

2. Use the scroll buttons to select the contact name. 

3. Press Return Q to view the contents of the record. 

Using Find 

You can use Find to locate any text that you specify, in any application. 
To use Find: 

1 . Press Option C ' and then press Shift to open the Find dialog 
box. 



Tip: If you select text in an application before you opening the Find dialog 
box, the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box. 

2. Enter the text that you want to find. 

Find is not case-sensitive. For example, searching for the name 
"davidson" also finds "Davidson." 
Find locates any word that begin with the text you enter. For 
example, searching for "plan" finds "planet," but not "airplane." 

3. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to start the search. 
Find searches for the text in all records and all notes. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Find 



Matches for "tech" 

SMS Message; 

Contacts 

Chen, Harry 408-333-S054W 
TechSuppor www.handspring.comW 

Datebook+ 

Tech conferen... 10/2/01 

Expense Items 

Memos 

For more information... 

[ Cancel ] (Find More] 



As your phone searches for the text, you can tap Stop at any time. 
You may want to do this if the entry you want appears before your 
phone finishes the search. To continue the search after you tap Stop, 
tap Find More. 
4. Tap the text that you want to review. 

Using Phone Number Lookup 

Phone Number Lookup displays the information you entered in the 
Contacts view in PhoneBook, and it lets you add this information to a 
record. 

To use Phone Number Lookup: 

1 . Display the record in which you want to insert a phone number. The 
record can be in Date Book Plus, To Do List, or Memo Pad. 

2. Press Menu . 

3. Under Options, select Phone Lookup (/L). 

4. If your Contacts view in PhoneBook is sorted by last name, begin to 
spell the last name. If your Contacts are sorted by first name, begin to 
spell the first name. 



Note: The first initial and last name search in the PhoneBook Instant 
Lookup feature is not available in the Phone Number Lookup feature. 

Phone Number Lookup displays records that begin with the letters 
you enter based on the sort method in your Contacts view in 
PhoneBook. For example, if your Contacts are sorted by last name 
and you enter "su," the list displays "John Sung" and "Mario 



Find: IflBB 

[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 




68 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Suarez." If your Contacts are sorted by first name, and your enter 
"su," the list displays "Susan Smith" and "Suki Sakimoto." 
5. Continue to spell the name you're looking for, or when you see the 
name, scroll to it. 



Phone Number Lookup: 



H.Jor,, E«l v |.. : , .. .. .... 

Alfonso, MariG E5E-1616H 
Barker, Todd E5E-1234W 

Francois, Michelle +33 (0) 100 IS I... W 

Hienrich, Karen S5S-2367W 

Lombardi, Gina 555-%% H 

Manicotti, Bill 408-SS5-6000W 

Martinez, Joje 11 5-E5E-8899 W 

Morn & Dad S5S-7777W 

Morn & Dad E5E-1133H 

Look Up: J ffldd") (c5n75) ^ 

6. Press Space . or Return *J . 

The name you selected, along with the other information associated with 
it, is pasted into the record you selected in step 1. 

Phone Number Lookup tips 

You can also enter the keyboard shortcut (/L) to activate the Phone 
Number Lookup feature in the following circumstances: 

While entering text: For example, if your Contacts view in 
PhoneBook is sorted by last name and you want to insert the full 
name and phone number for someone with the last name 
"Williams," enter "Wi" and then the Phone Number Lookup 
keyboard shortcut (/L) . Assuming you have only one Contacts record 
with a last name that begins with "Wi," your phone inserts the full 
name "Fred Williams" (and its associated information) . If you have 
more than one name that begins with "Wi," the Phone Number 
Lookup screen appears and highlights the first record that begins 
with "Wi." 

». For selected text: Drag to highlight the text, and then enter the 
Phone Number Lookup keyboard shortcut (/L) . Your phone replaces 
the selected text and adds the name and its associated information. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Looking up names to add to expense records 

In Expense, Lookup displays the names of Contacts entries in Phonebook 
that have data in the Company field. You can add these names to a list of 
attendees associated with an Expense record. 

To add names to an Expense record: 

1 . Open the Expense record to which you want to add names. 

2. Tap Details. 



Receipt Details 



Category: w Unfiled 
Type: if Lunch 
Payment: ▼ Unfiled 
Currency: $ 
Vendor: 
City: 
attendees: i Who... j 



[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete] [Note] ^ 



3. Tap Who. 



Receipt Details 



Category: t Unfiled 
Type: Lunch 
Payment: ▼ MasterCard 
Currency: $ 
Vendor: Rosie's Cat's 



City: San Francisco 
Attendees: Who 

[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete] [Note] . 



-Tap here 



[ Done ] [ Lookup ] |j| a| f 



4. Tap Lookup. 

The Attendees Lookup screen displays all the names of Contacts entries 
in Phonebook that have data in the Company field. 

5. Use the scroll buttons to select the name you want to add. 

6. Press Space G^iiS or Return <J . 

The name appears in the Attendees screen. 

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to add more names. 

8. Hold Option and press Return >J twice to finish. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Sorting lists of records 

You can sort lists of records in various ways, depending on the 
application. Sorting is available in applications that have list screens: 
Contacts view in PhoneBook, To Do List, Memo Pad, and Expense. 

Note: You can also assign records to categories. See page 62 for details. 

To sort records in To Do List and Expense: 

1 . Open the application to display the list screen. 

2. Tap Show. 

3. Tap the Sort by pick list and select an option. 

4. Hold Option Q and press Return >J to finish. 

To sort records in Contacts view in PhoneBook and Memo Pad: 

1 . Open the application to display the list screen. 

2. Press Menu #p». 

3. Under Options, select Preferences (/R). 



Contacts View Preferences 



□ Remember last category 
List By: 

| First Marine, Last Marine | 
[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 

Contacts 

4. Do one of the following: 
Contacts view in PhoneBook: Tap the setting you want. 
Memo Pad: Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic or 
Manual. 

5. Hold Option Q and press Return ^ to finish. 

To sort the Memo list manually, tap and drag a memo to a new location 
in the list. 



Memo Preferences © 



Sort by: Alphabetic 

[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



Memo Pad 



Note: To make the list of your memos appear in Palm Desktop software as 
you manually sorted it on your phone, open Memo in Palm Desktop 
software, click Sort by, and then select Order on Handheld. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Making records private 

In all PIM applications, except Expense, you can make individual 
records private. Private records remain visible and accessible, however, 
until you select the Security setting to hide or mask all private records. 
See the section that begins on page 43 for details. 

Hiding and masking private records 

You can hide records that you mark as private. When you hide records, 
they do not appear anywhere in the application. When you mask records, 
a visual placeholder appears where the record would normally appear. If 
you define a password, you must enter it to display private records. 



Note: As a security measure, masked Contacts records are temporarily 
hidden when you search for records. So you will not see a placeholder for 
these records when viewing the results of a Lookup or Find request. 

To make a record private: 

1 . Display the entry that you want to make private. 

2. Tap Details. 

3. Tap the Private check box to select it. 

4. Hold Option and press Return Q to finish. 

To hide or mask all private records: 

1 . Make sure the records you want to mask are marked private. 

2. Press Option J 1 and then press Menu r^aa to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

3. Tap the Security icon 

4. Tap the Current Privacy pick list. 



[Security ^ 8MB^ 




Current 

Privacy: y Show Records 






Password: ; -Un assigned- 1 




[ Help ) 



Tap here 



72 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



5. Tap either Hide Records or Mask Records. 

6. Hold Option and press Return Q to confirm that you want to 
change the security setting. 

To display all private records: 

1. Press Option O and then press Menu gaai to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the Security icon 

3. Tap the Current Privacy pick list. 



[Security ^E^^^^^^^IW^Hi 




Current 

Privacy: y Mask Records 






Password: j -Unassigned- 1 




[ Help ) 



Tap here 



4. Tap Show Records. 

If you do not have a password, private records become visible. 
If you have a password, the Show Private Records dialog box appears. 
Enter your password in this dialog box, and then hold Option Q 
and press Return <J to finish. 

To display a specific masked record: 

1 . Open the application that contains the record you want to view. 

2. Tap the shaded bar that masks the record. 



Tap here 





Memo 


▼ Fill 


1. Handheld Basics 

2. Three Ways to Enter Text 

3. Download Applications 
A. Power 1 Tips 


-•■ mmmmm 








]New] 





Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Note: If you have a password, you must enter your password and then 
hold Option and press Return ~J to view the record. 



To display all private records in a specific application: 

1 . Open the application in which you want to display the records. 

2. Press Menu gpa . 

3. Under Options, select Security (/H). 

4. Tap the Current Privacy pick list. 



Change Security @ 



Current 

Privacy: T Mask Records 
[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



5. Tap Show Records. 

6. Hold Option ( and press Return Q to finish. 

Attaching notes 

In all PIM applications except Memo Pad, you can attach a note to a 
record. A note can be up to several thousand characters long. For 
example, for an appointment in Date Book Plus, you can attach a note 
with directions to the location. 

To attach a note to a record: 

1 . Display the entry to which you want to add a note. 

2. In Contacts view in PhoneBook only: Press Menu , and under 
Record, select Edit Contact (/E). 

3. Tap Details. 

4. Tap Note. 

5. Enter your note. 

6. Hold Option C and press Return >J to finish. 

A small note icon appears at the right side of any item that has a note. 



4:00, 





. 6:00, Dinner with Jilt & Dave D 


1 7:00 p 






■ -|:::|:::|:::|-| [New)[Derailj][5o) 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



To review or edit a note: 

1. Tap the Note icon D. 

To delete a note: 

1. Tap the Note icon D. 

2. Tap Delete. 

3. Hold Option (J and press Return «J for Yes. 

Choosing fonts 

In all PIM applications except Expense, you can change the font style to 
make text easier to read. You can choose a different font style for each 
application. 



[Memo 1 of 1 ■ 


i Unfiled! 




Memo 1 of 1 1 ^^^^^9 


11/22 Meeting Minute; 


1 1/22 Meeting Minutes 






Bill Davidson to study time 


Bill Davidson to study time 


m an ag erne nt p t og t cm as 

irnpLr i.n ad L i=rnf I „s 


management program as 
implemented by employees. 






M iche le Bak er to report on 
expanding markets in the Dallas - 


Michele Baker to report on 
expanding markets in the 


Fort ..Worth ..greg. 


Dallas - Fort. Worth area. 










Memo 1 of 1 ^SlffilSl 




[ Done) [ Details ] 


11/22 Meeting Minutes 


Details ) 


Small font 




Bold font 


Bill Davidsnn to study time 


management program as 


implemented by employees. 




Michele Baker to report on 
expanding markets in the 


f Done ] f Derail; ) 



Large font 



To change the font style: 

1. Open an application. 

2. Press Menu ffpa». 

3. Under Options, select Font (/F). 

4. Use the scroll buttons to select the font style you want to use. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Small font 





Select Font 




Font: 


a HQ 




1 




[OK J [ Cancel ] L 





-Bold font 
-Large font 



5. Hold Option C : and press Return Q to finish. 

Exchanging and updating data: HotSync operations 

The HotSync process automatically synchronizes — that is, exchanges 
and updates — data between your phone and desktop software. Changes 
you make on your phone or desktop software appear in both places after a 
HotSync operation. HotSync technology synchronizes only the needed 
portions of files, thus reducing synchronization time. You can synchronize 
your data directly by connecting your phone to your computer with the 
HotSync cable or by beaming the data from the IR port on your phone to 
the IR port on your computer or indirectly with a network. See Section 8 for 
information about performing HotSync operations via the IR port or a 
network. 

Performing a HotSync operation for the first time 

The first time you synchronize your data, you need to enter user 
information on both the phone and Palm Desktop software. After you enter 
this information and synchronize, the HotSync Manager recognizes your 
phone and doesn't ask for this information again. 

If you are a System Administrator preparing several phones for a group of 
users, you may want to create a user profile. See the section that begins on 
page 228 before performing the following steps. 



Important: You must use the HotSync cable for your first HotSync operation. 

The following steps assume that you have already installed the Palm 
Desktop software. If you have not installed this software, see page 20 for 
instructions. 

To perform a local HotSync operation: 

1 . Connect your phone to the HotSync cable. See the section that begins 
on page 19 for details. 



76 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



2. If the HotSync Manager is not running, start it: On the Windows 
desktop, click Start, and then choose Programs. Navigate to the 
Sprint (or Palm) program group and choose HotSync Manager. 

Alternatively, you can start the Palm Desktop software which 
automatically opens the HotSync Manager. 

3. Press the HotSync button on the cable. 



HotSync 
button — 




Important: The first time you perform a HotSync operation, you must enter a 
user name in the New User dialog box and click OK. Every phone should 
have a unique name. To prevent loss of a user's records, never try to 
synchronize more than one phone to the same user name. 



4. From the Select User dialog box, choose the user name you assigned 
to your phone. 

The HotSync Progress dialog box appears and synchronization begins. 



HotSync Progress 


Status: Synchronising Mail 




User: Arthur Manzi 








|| Cancel | 





5. Wait for a message on your phone indicating that the process is done. 

After the HotSync process is complete, you can remove your phone from 
the cable. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



77 



Beaming information 

Your phone is equipped with an IR (infrared) port that you can use to 
beam information to another Palm OS device that's close by and also has 
an IR port. The IR port is located on the top of your phone, between the 
power button and the ringer switch, behind the small dark shield. 

You can beam the following information between Palm OS devices: 
». The record currently displayed in Date Book Plus, the Contacts view 

in PhoneBook, To Do List, or Memo Pad 
». All records of the category currently displayed in the Contacts view in 

PhoneBook, To Do List, or Memo Pad 
► A special record in the Contacts view of PhoneBook that you 

designate as your personal business card, containing information 

you want to exchange with business contacts 
». An application installed in RAM memory 

You can also use the infrared port to perform HotSync operations. See the 
section that begins on page 219 for details. 

To select a business card: 

1 . In the Contacts view in PhoneBook, create an entry that contains the 
information you want on your personal business card. 

2. Press Menu (jgj . 

3. Under Record, select Select Business Card. 

4. Hold Option Q and press Return >J for Yes. 

To beam a record, business card, or category of records: 

1 . Locate the record, business card, or category you want to beam. 

2. Press Menu c^m . 

3. Under Record, select one of the following: 

The Beam command for an individual record (/B) 

In the Contacts view in PhoneBook only: Beam Business Card (/M) 

Beam Category (/Y) 

4. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly 
at the IR port of the receiving phone. 



78 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Tip: For best results, the path between the two devices must be clear of 
obstacles. If you have difficulty beaming information, see the 
troubleshooting tips that begin on page 247. 




5. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is 
complete before you continue working on your phone. 

To beam an application: 

1. Press Option O and then press Menu to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Press Menu <^a. 

3. Under App, select Beam (/B). 

4. Tap the application you want to transfer. 



Note: Some applications are copy-protected and cannot be beamed. 
These are listed with a lock icon next to them. 

5. Tap Beam. 

6. When the Beam Status dialog box appears, point the IR port directly 
at the IR port of the receiving phone. 

7. Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is 
complete before you continue working on your phone. 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



To receive beamed information: 

1. Hirn on your phone. 

2. Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting phone to 
open the Beam Status dialog box. 

3. When the Beam dialog box appears, select a category for the entry. 



Tip: If you do not select a category the entry is placed in the Unfiled 
category. 

4. Hold Option O and press Return *J for Yes. 



Tip: When you receive beamed information with the lid closed, you don't 
need to respond to the Beam dialog box; simply press the top scroll button 
for Yes, or the bottom scroll button for No. 



80 



Section 5 
Common Tasks 



Chapter 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 

This chapter is organized by application and gives instructions on 
how to do tasks that are specific to each of the following 
applications: 
». PhoneBook 
». Date Book Plus 

Blazer 1 
». Memo Pad 

► SMS 

► To Do List 

► CityTime 
». Calculator 

► Expense 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



PhoneBook 

PhoneBook is the application where you store name and address 
information about people or businesses, and where you place and receive 
telephone calls. 

PhoneBook has five main views. You can place and receive calls from 
within any view, and you can also receive calls when the screen is off (but 
wireless mode must be on) . The sections that follow explain how to use 
each of these views. 

To change the PhoneBook view, do one of the following: 

► Repeatedly press PhoneBook <_> to cycle through the views. 
». Tap the icons in the lower-left corner of the PhoneBook screen. 

Note: The Active Call icon and view appear only after you place an 
outgoing call or receive an incoming call. 

When your phone is connected to the PCS Vision data network, the signal 
strength bars will include gray arrows. When you send and receive data, 
the arrows turn green and your calls are automatically sent to voicemail. 



82 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Speed Dial view 



Dial Pad view 



7:34 prn 



S Till 



f Voicernoil ] f lYIidyne (IYI) ] 

( LisntW) j ( Per(W) ] 
f Bill (H) ] ( Olgg(H) ] 



f Harry (W) ] 

BjlilllMl I 



View 
icons 



7:34 prn 



S Till 



1E3 2 AEC 



4GHI jS^K? j^MNo] ^CLRj 



000 



Contacts view 



Contacts ^| 


» fl" Iiil 1 


Best, Lisa 




Bjork, Per 

Boring, Allison 
Cadwell, Chris 


1-650-5S5-8996H 

□ 

1-11E-111-S3S6W 
1 -S1 0-666-2561 H 

1 -S1 0-666-3561 H 

1-650-5S5-S035W 
1-650-5E5-1701H 


llll=!=H^I 





Call History view 



Call History M 35IHW11 


4 Voice mail 


Tu 1/10 t 


4 Home 


Mo 1/9 I 


£ Maura Rees(H) 


Mo 1/9 I 


4 Voicermail 


Mo 1/9 j 


^ Home 


Su 1/8 I 


4 Maura(W) 


Sa 1/7 1 


^ Maura Rees(H) 


Th 1/5 I 


4 11235E5E781 iTh 1/5 S 


► 11235S5S781 


Th 1/5 | 


4 Christie CadwelKW) 


Th 1/5 I 


Christie Cadwell(W> 


Th 1/5 4 


illl ■!■!-=■ t Add J [Details 



Active Call view 



7:39 prn 



S Till 



^ Midyne (M) fictivs 
1-831-555-6737 ooio 



Hang 
Up 



Spkr- 
phone 



Mute 



At the top of each view, many of the following common icons appear to 
provide wireless mode status information for your phone: 



Network time 
indicates wireless . 
mode is on 



-7:38 prn 



Voicemail notification icon 
i Lil II— 



Battery 
"gauge 



Signal strength icon 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Using the Speed Dial view 

You can store up to 50 phone numbers in the Speed Dial list. There are 
five pages of numbers that hold ten numbers per page. 

Tip: You can keep your Speed Dial list organized by storing different types 
of numbers on different pages. For example, create separate pages for 
family, business, friends, and emergency numbers. 



Defining a Speed Dial button 

For each Speed Dial button you can assign a name, phone number, and 
extra digits such as an extension. By default, the first slot on the first 
Speed Dial page is reserved for your PCS voicemail number. You cannot 
delete this entry or change the phone number, but you can move the 
voicemail entry to another button and add Extra digits. 

To define a Speed Dial button: 

1. Open the lid or press PhoneBook J) if you are in another 
application. 

2. Tap a blank Speed Dial button. 



Edit Entry © 



Name: 

Number: 
Extra Digits: 

□ Dial Extra Digit: automatically 

□ Enable unique ring t Treo 
( Done ] ( Cancel ] [ Lookup ] f 

3. Enter the Name you want to assign to the button. 

4. Press the bottom scroll button to move to the Number field and enter 
the phone number associated with the button. 

5. Press the bottom scroll button to move to the Extra Digits field and 
enter an extension number or other additional digits if needed. 



Tip: To insert a pause between Extra digits when dialing, enter a comma 
(,). Each comma represents a one second pause. 



7:34 prn g Till I 

f Voicemoil ] f IVIidyne (IYI) ] 
( Chris (W) ] ( Greg ] 
( LisutW) j ( Per (W) ] 
f Bill (H) ] f Qlga(H) ] 
f Harry (W) ] ( ] 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



6. Tap the Dial Extra Digits Automatically check box to 

automatically dial these digits each time you select this speed dial 
entry. 



Hp: When you enable the Dial Extra Digits Automatically option, your 
phone inserts a two second pause before dialing the extra digits. 

7. Tap the Enable unique ringer check box to assign a unique ring 
tone to incoming calls from the number in this speed dial entry, and 
then tap the pick list to select the ring tone. 

8. Hold Option and press Return Q to finish. 

Adding Contacts list entries to your Speed Dial list 

To save time while creating your Speed Dial list, you can add entries from 
your Contacts list. 

To add an entry from your Contacts list to your Speed Dial list: 

1 . Tap a blank Speed Dial button. 

2. Tap Lookup. 



Hp: You can also use the Phone Number Lookup feature to locate the 
entry you want to add. See the section that begins on page 68 for details. 



Name: 

Number: 

Extra Digits: 



□ Dial Extra Digit: automatically 

□ Enable unique ring t Treo 



( Done ] ( Cancel ] [ Lookup ] 



Tap Lookup 



Phone Number Lookup: 



Fldams, Becky 
Alfonso, Maria 
Barker, Todd 

Francois, Michelle 
Hienrich, Karen 
Lombardi, Gina 
Manicotti, Bill 
Martinez, Jose 
Mom & Dad 
Mom & Dad 



1-B00-S5S-2222W 
555-1616 H 
555-123-1W 

+33(0) 100 IS 1...W 
555-2367W 
555-%% H 
403-555-6000 W 
41 5-555-8899 W 
555-7777W 
ESE-1133H 



Look Up: J fHdd~] [Cancel) 



Tap Add 



3. If your Contacts list is sorted by last name, begin entering the 
person's last name. If your Contacts list is sorted by first name, begin 
entering the person's first name. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



4. Select the entry you want to use and press Return Q 



Tip: You can edit the entry by tapping the number or name in the Edit Entry 
dialog. 

5. In the Edit Entry dialog, tap the Dial Extra Digits automatically check 
box to automatically dial these digits each time you select this speed 
dial entry. 

6. Press the bottom scroll button to move to the Enable unique ringer 
check box, press Space r a* to assign a unique ring tone to 
incoming calls from the number in this speed dial entry, and then tap 
the pick list to select the ring tone. 

7. Hold Option ( and press Return Q to finish. 

Calling a Speed Dial number 

Speed dialing enables you to quickly place a call without entering the 
number. This is particularly useful for numbers you call often, such as your 
home or office. You can also call a number in your Speed Dial list using the 
hands-free headset. 

To dial a number from the Speed Dial view: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Press PhoneBook c_J> . 

3. Use the scroll buttons to select the Speed Dial button for the number 
you want to call. 



Tip: To jump to the next page of Speed Dial buttons, select the first button on 
the page and press the top scroll button. 

4. Press Space c^^B to dial. 



Tip: You can also tap the Speed Dial button for the number you want to call, 
or roll the rocker switch to select the button and then press the rocker switch 
or Return w* to dial the number. 



86 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



7:34 prn 



f Voicernoil ] f lYIidyne (M) 
( Chris (W) ] 



s Iiil 



Greg 



( LisutW) j ( Per(W) j 
( Bill (H) ] f Olga(H) J 
f Harry (W) ] ( ] 



Selected 
button 



7:39 prn 



S Till 



^Midyne(M) 
1-831-555-6737 



Hang 
Up 



Active 
00:10 



Spkr- 
phone 



Mute 



B3 



Tip: During a call, if you are prompted to enter a menu selection, use the 
keyboard, or go to the Dial Pad view and tap the numbers. If you defined Extra 
Digits, such as an extension, and did not enable automatic dialing of Extra 
Digits, tap Extra Digits. 



5. Close the lid to end the call. 
Changing a Speed Dial entry 

You can change any of the information associated with a Speed Dial button. 

Note: You cannot change the phone number for your PCS voicemail service, 
but you can add Extra Digits to this voicemail entry. 

To change a Speed Dial entry: 

1 . From the Speed Dial view, highlight the entry you want to change. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Edit, select Edit Speed Dial (/E). 



Edit Entry © 



Name: Harry (W) 

Number: 1-4.08-333-80H. 

Extra Digits: 

□ Dial Extra Digit: automatically 

□ Enable unique ring t Treo 

( Done ] ( Cancel ] [ Lookup ] f 

4. In the Edit Entry dialog, enter the new information. 

5. Hold Option Q and press Return Q twice to save the new information. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



87 



Deleting Speed Dial entries 

If your Speed Dial list becomes full, or you no longer need an entry, you 
can delete it. 

Note: You cannot delete the Speed Dial button for your PCS voicemail 
service. 



To delete a Speed Dial entry: 

1 . From the Speed Dial view, highlight the entry you want to delete. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Edit, select Edit Speed Dial (/E). 

4. In the Edit Entry dialog, tap Delete. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return \J twice to confirm deletion. 

Arranging the Speed Dial list 

As your Speed Dial list grows, you may want to rearrange the entries. For 
example you might want to store different types of numbers on different 
pages, or arrange the list alphabetically. 

To arrange the Speed Dial list: 

1 . From the Speed Dial view, press Menu c^zm . 

2. Under Edit, select Edit Speed Dial Pages (/F). 

3. Drag the entries to the slot where you want them to appear. 



Edit Speed Dial Pages © 



Drag an entry to 
another slot or 
page 



Voicemail 


Midyne (M) 


Chris (W) 


Greg 


Lisa(W) 


Per(W) 


Bill(H) 


Olga (H) 


- Harry (W) 


x ► 


12 3 4 5 

f Done ] 



Tip: If the new slot is full, the other entries in the column move down one 
slot, and overflow from the left column moves to the top of the right 
column. If you drag an entry to a page icon, the entry moves to the first 
available slot on that page. You cannot drag an entry to a full page. 

4. Hold Option (_ and press Return Q to finish. 
Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Using the Dial Pad view 

The Dial Pad view provides access to a more traditional phone interface. 
You can use this view to dial numbers that are not in your Speed Dial or 
Contacts list. 

To dial a number with the Dial Pad: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Press PhoneBook c_> to access the Dial Pad view [jjQ. 

3. Enter the number you want to dial. 



Tip: You don't need to press before entering the number. 



— I 1-800-555-3456 



irsi 2 AEC 3 DEF ^ 



4ghi [5J kl [6mno 



CLR 



BB0 



[ Phone Tip; ] 



Backspace erases last digit 



-CLR deletes entire entry 



- Send dials number in dial box 

Phone Tips displays helpful 
PhoneBook hints 



Tip: To display the last ten numbers dialed, press the scroll buttons or roll 
the rocker switch and then press the rocker switch to dial the selected 
number. 

4. Press Space to dial. 

5. Close the lid to end the call. 

Using the Contacts view 

The Contacts view is where you store name and address information 
about people, businesses, and more. 

Creating a Contacts entry 

You can create Contacts entries on your phone, or you can use your 
desktop software to create entries on your computer and then download 
the entries to your phone with your next HotSync operation. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Many desktop software applications also have data import capabilities 
that enable you to load database files into your Contacts list on your 
phone. See the section that begins on page 32 and the online Help for 
your desktop software for more information. 

To create a new Contacts entry: 

1 . Press PhoneBook cj) repeatedly to access the Contacts view [J]- 

2. Press Menu cmm . 

3. Under Record, select New Contact (/N). 



Contacts ^| 


» fl" Iiil 1 


Best, Lisa 




Bjork, Per 

Boring, Allison 
CadwelL Chris 


1-650-5S5-89%H 

□ 

H1E-+f 4-5356 W 
1-510-W6-2561H 

1-S10-M6-2564H 

1-650- 555-5035 W 
1-650-555-1704 H 


lllllH=l 





Cursor 
at Last 
name 



Contact Edit 



— UBEHBBI 

First name 
Title: 
Company: 

▼ Work 

▼ Home: 

▼ Mobile 

▼ Other: 

▼ E-mail: 
Address 

City: 



Done ] [Details...] [ Mote ] f ^ 



4. Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Contacts 
list. 

Press the bottom scroll button to move to the First Name field and 
then enter the person's first name. 

Press the bottom scroll button to move to other fields and then enter 
the other information that you want to include in this entry. 



5. 



6. 



Tip: Hold Shift rzzi and use the scroll buttons to scroll the page up or 
down. 



7. After you finish entering information, hold Option C and press 
Return *J to finish. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



EHEH3B Knight 

First name: Claudia 
Titles 

Company: 



Contact Edit 



"Work: 650-777-3344 



' Home 650-444-5678 

Fax: 

» Other: 
t E-mail: 



[ Done ] [Details... ] [ Mote ] 



Hp: To create an entry that always appears atthetop of the Contacts list, 
begin the Last name or Company field with a symbol, as in *lf Found Call*. 
This entry can contain contact information in case you lose your phone. 

Duplicating a Contacts entry 

You can duplicate existing entries, which can be helpful when you want 
to enter multiple people from a single organization. When you duplicate 
an entry, the word Copy appears next to the name in the First Name field. 

To duplicate an entry: 

1 . From the Contacts view, select the name you want to duplicate. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Record, and select Duplicate Contact (/T). 

4. Edit the entry as necessary. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return \j to finish. 

Calling a number in your Contacts list 

You can dial any number that you've entered in your Contacts list. 

To dial a number in your Contacts list: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. From the Contacts view, use the Instant Lookup feature to select the 
number you want to call. See the section that begins on page 66 for 
details. 

3. Press Space to dial. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Tip: You can also roll the rocker switch to scroll to the number you wantto 
call, and then press the rocker switch to dial the number. 

If you need to prepend digits, such as *67 to block caller ID or *70 to 
disable call waiting, tap the Contact entry to access the Dial dialog box, 
enter the digits, and then hold Option and press Return ij to dial. 



Tap to select a 
different category 







Contacts ^| 




' Hll Till 1 


Best, Lisa 




Bjork, Per 

Boring, Allison 
tadwell, Chris 


1-650-555-89% H 

□ 

1-4 15-444-5356 W 
1-510-666-2564 H 

1-510-666-2564 H 

1-650- 555-5035 W 
1 -650-555- 1 704 H 


IIII1H=I 




[New) ^ 



Tap a number to 
- select it 



Dial Lisa Best 



1-650-555-5231 



[ Dial ] [ Cancel ) 



Tap Dial to call the number 



4. Close the lid to end the call. 
Selecting types of phone numbers 

You can select the types of phone numbers or e-mail addresses that you 
associate with a Contacts entry. Any changes you make apply only to the 
current entry. 

To select other types of phone numbers in an entry: 

1 . Select the contact name for the entry that you want to change. 

2. Press Space to open the entry. 

3. Press Menu 

4. Under Record, select Edit Contact (/E). 

5. Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Contact Edit 



Knight 

First name Claudia 
Title 

Company: 
▼ Work 

Home: 



^ Fax: 
•w Other: 
E-mai 



I 



650-777-3344 



650-444-567S 



[ Done ] [Details... ] [ Mote ] 



Tap 

triangle 



EUSEBB Knight 

First name Claudia 
Title 



Contact Edit 



Home 

Fax 

Other 

E-nnail 

Main 

Pager 

Mobile 



650-777-3344 



650-444-5G7S 



[Details... ] [ Mote ] 



6. Select a new label. 

7. Hold Option and press Return *J to finish. 
Changing Contact entry details 

The Contact Entry Details dialog box provides a variety of options that 
you can associate with an entry. 

To open the Contact Entry Details dialog box: 
1. 
2. 
3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 



Select the name for the entry whose details you want to change. 
Press Space m- to open the entry. 
Press Menu . 

Under Record, select Edit Contact (/E). 

Press Menu ^mm . 
Under Record, select Details (/E). 



Contact Entry Details 0 



Category: t Business 
Private: □ 

[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete...] [Note] 



7. Select any of the following settings: 

Category Assign the entry to a category. 

Private Hide this entiy when Security is turned on. 



8. Hold Option C and press Return to finish. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



93 



Using the Call History view 

The Call History view provides quick access to the previous 1,000 
incoming and outgoing calls. 

If you miss a call when your PCS Treo 300 is on and you remain in a 
coverage area, your missed calls appear in the Call History list and you 
receive a missed call alert message. When your phone is off or you travel 
outside a coverage area, your missed calls are foiwarded to voicemail and 
they do not appear in the Call History list. Similarly, when your phone is 
off or you travel outside a coverage area, the PCS network stores your text 
messages until you turn on your phone or return to a coverage area. 

Reviewing Call History 

Each item in the Call History view appears with an icon next to it 
indicating whether it is a Missed call, an incoming call, or an outgoing 
call. You can display all your calls or one category at a time. 



To review Call History: 

1. Press PhoneBook ' 



repeatedly to access the Call History view 



Missed call 
Outgoing call 
Incoming call 



^ Voicennail 
^ Home 

Maura Rees(H) 
^ Voicennail 
^ Home 
4 Maura(W) 

Maura Rees(H) 



T fll Illl 



ru i/io 

Mo A/9 
Wo A /1 



Mo A/9 
Su A/S 
Sa A/7 
Th A/S 




Tap arrow to 
select the call 
category: All, 
Incoming, 
Outgoing, or 
Missed 



Tap Details to view time of call 



2. Tap the pick list at the top of the screen to display a specific type of 
call: Missed, Incoming, or Outgoing. 



Tip: To temporarily store a number in your phone's memory, press Menu 
Ci3 , under Record, select Details (/E), tap Copy Phone #, and then hold 
Option and press Return Q to finish. You can now Paste this number 
into any application on your phone. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Calling a number in your Call History list 

In addition to viewing a list of your incoming, outgoing, and missed 
calls, you can use the Call History view to dial any number that appears 
on this view. 



To dial a number from the Call History view: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Use the scroll buttons to select the number you want to call. 



Select the entry you 
want to dial 



Call History ■^JilWffll 


4 Vokermail 


Tu 1/10 * 


4 Home 


Mo 1/9 I 


$ Maura Rees(H) 


Mo 1/9 I 


4 Voicernail 


Mo 1/9 I 


4 Home 


Su 1/S I 


4 Maura(W) 


Sa 1/7 1 


^ Maura Rees(H) 


Th 1/5 I 


4 11235555781 iTh 1/5 S 


► 11235S55781 


Th 1/5 | 


4 Christie CadurelKYY) 


Th 1/5 | 


|> Christie Cadwell(W> 


Th 1/5 4 


llll ■!■!-=■ t Add J [Details 



3. Press Space 



to dial. 



Hp: If you need to prepend digits, such as an area code, *67 to block caller 
ID, or *70 to disable call waiting, tap the Call History entry to access the 
Dial dialog box, enter the digits, and then hold Option and press Return 
J to dial. 



Adding a Call History entry to your Contacts list 

If you receive a call from someone with caller ID information who is not 
in your Contacts list, you can use the Call History view to add the caller to 
your Contacts list. 

To add a Call History entry to your Contacts list: 

1 . Use the scroll buttons to select the number you want to add. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Select the entry you 
want to add 



Call History B"™"33Mmll 


4 Voice mail 


Tu 1/10 f 


4 Home 


Mo 1/9 I 


£ Maura Rees(H) 


Mo 1/9 I 


4 Voicemail 


Mo 1/9 I 


4 Home 


Su 1/S I 


4 Maura(W) 


Sa 1/7 1 


^ Maura Rees(H) 


Th 1/5 I 


4 11235555781 :Th 1/5 S 


► 11235555781 


Th 1/5 | 


4 Chi-rstle CadwelKW} 


Th 1/5 I 


^Christie Cadwell(W> 


Th 1/5 4 


= = ■!■ -= W t fidd J [Details 



Tap Add to add 
selected number 



2. Press Menu Cjpzk . 

3. Under Record, select Add (/N). 

4. In the Contact Edit screen, enter any additional information. 

5. Hold Option C and press Return \J to finish. 



Tip: To add a number to your Speed Dial list, press Menu , under 
Record, select Details (/E), tap Copy Phone #, go to the Speed Dial view, 
open the Edit Speed Dial screen for the entry where you want to add the 
number, scroll to the Number field, and then press Menu emm . under Edit, 
select Paste (/P) to insert the number. 



Purging Call History 

Your PCS Treo 300 continues accumulating Call History information for 
up to 1,000 calls until you purge the Call History list. To conserve storage 
space, we recommend that you purge this list periodically. 



Note: Using the Purge function permanently removes the calls from your 
phone. You cannot undo this process to restore the information. 

To purge entries in Call History view: 

1 . From the Call History view, press Menu c^m . 

2. Under Record, select Purge. 



Tip: To delete a specific item, select the item from the Call History view 
and select Delete Item from the Record menu instead of Purge. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



3. Select the purge option you want to use. 



Tap the pick list to 
choose whichcallsto- 
purge 



Delete calls: 

^ older than 1 week 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



4. Hold Option l and press Return to finish. 
Using the Active Call view 

After you dial and establish a connection, or receive an incoming call, 
the Active Call view icon appears in the lower left comer of the 
PhoneBook screen, and the Active Call view appears: 



7:39 prn 



s Iiil 



^Midyne(M) 
1-831-555-6737 



Active 
00:10 



Hang 
Up 



Spkr- 
phone 



► 

Extra 
Digits 



Tap Extra Digits to 
enter extra numbers 
'such as a passcode or 
menu selection 



Note: If you dialed an entry that includes predefined Extra Digits and you 
did not enable automatic dialing of Extra Digits, the Mute button changes 
to an Extra Digits button. Tap Extra Digits to dial the additional predefined 
numbers, such as an extension. 

If you did not define Extra Digits and need to enter additional numbers, use 
the keyboard to enter the numbers. 



Receiving Calls 

Whenever your phone's wireless mode is on and you are within a 
coverage area, you can receive incoming calls. An incoming call turns on 
your phone's screen if it is off and displays the following alert: 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



97 



Callers name 
and phone 
number if 
available 



Tap Answer to 
accept the call 



Midyne(M) 
1-831-555-6737 



✓ 




X 


Answer 




Ignore 



Tap Ignore to send the 
call to voicemail 

To answer a call while it is ringing, do any of the following: 

». Open the lid if it is closed. 

». Tap Answer if the lid is open. 

». Press the button on the headset (if it is attached) . 

To ignore a call and send it directly to voicemail, do any of the 
following: 

>> Close the lid if it is open. 
». Press the top scroll button. 



Note: It takes approximately 30 seconds to send the call to voicemail. 
During this interval you can receive another incoming call, but you cannot 
initiate another call. 



To silence the ring, do any of the following: 

». Press any application button or the power button on your phone. 
Slide the ringer switch to the silent position . 



Note: Placing the ringer switch in the silent position turns off all system 
sounds, including alarms. When you silence the ringer, Date Book Plus 
alarms vibrate. 



98 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



To end a call, do any of the following: 

Close the lid (if the headset is not attached) . 
». Press Backspace Q . 

Press the button on the headset (if it is attached) . 
». Tap Hang Up. 



Note: Pressing the power button while a call is active puts your phone into 
sleep mode. It does not end the call. 



Adjusting call volume 

You can adjust the volume level from the Active Call view when a call is 
in progress. 

To adjust the call volume, do one of the following: 

». Roll the rocker switch up, or press the top scroll button, to increase 
the volume. 

». Roll the rocker switch down, or press the bottom scroll button, to 
decrease the volume. 



Muting the microphone 

You can mute the microphone from the Active Call view when a call is in 
progress. When mute is enabled, the person on the other end of the 
phone call cannot hear you. This is particularly useful if you need to 
cough, sneeze, or say something you don't want the other person to hear. 

To toggle mute on and off, do one of the following: 

». Press Return Q . 
Tap Mute. 



7:38 prn 



El Till 



^ Midyne (M) fictivs 
1-831-555-6737 0010 



Hang 
Up 



Spkr- 
phone 



•III 

Mute 



B3 



Tap Mute to toggle 
' microphone on/off 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Using the speakerphone 

The speakerphone button enables you to view your phone screen and use 
other applications while you're talking on the phone. 

Note: The speakerphone feature is optimized for one or two people that 
are reasonably close to the phone. It is not designed for a conference 
room or large group. This feature is not available when a headset is 
attached to your phone. 



To use the speakerphone: 

1. Place a call. 

2. From the Active Call screen, tap Spkrphone. 



7:38 prn 


is T..II 1 




7:38 pill H Lll | 


^ Midyne (M) fictivs 
1-831-555-6737 ooio 


^ Midyne (M) fictivs 
1-831-555-6737 oiio 


X II 


J/ ff 




X II 


Cancel .. ^ 
Spkr Mute 


lii >*H 


ii >NH 



Tap Spkrphone Tap Cancel Spkr 

3. Tap Cancel Spkr to turn off the speakerphone. 



Tip: You can also press Space to toggle the speakerphone on 

and off. 

Placing calls on hold 

You can place an active call on hold while you use other applications on 
your phone or complete another task. 

To place a call on hold: 

1. Place or answer a call. 



100 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Call status indicator 




7:38 prn 

^Midyne(M) 
1-831-555-6737 



B T.ill 

-OnHold 
04:38 



DD 

Off 




2nd 


Hold 




. Call 



2. Tap Hold to place the call on hold. 

3. Tap Off Hold to return to the call. 

Handling Multiple Calls 

You can use the Active Call view to handle a variety of situations that 
involve multiple calls. During an active call, you can receive or place 
another call, switch between two active calls, and create a 3-way 
conference call. For example, when you're talking to a friend, you can 
place another call to a restaurant to make dinner reservations, and 
return to your friend to confirm the time and place. You can also 
facilitate 3-way conference calls when you're on the go, and use call 
waiting to receive an important incoming call while you're already on 
the phone. 

To respond to call waiting, do one of the following: 

Tap Hold & Answer to place the first call on hold and answer the 
second call. 

»- Tap Ignore to send the second call to voicemail. 
». Press the button on the headset (if it is attached) to place the first 
call on hold and to answer the second call. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Callers name 
and phone 
number if 
available 



Tap Hold& 
Answer 



Call Waiting 



Midyne 

• 1-831-555-6737 



✓ 




X 


HoldS 




Ignore 


Answer 





Tap Ignore to send 
call to voicernail 



Tip: You can switch between two active calls by tapping Swap or by 
pressing the button on the headset (if it is attached). The Swap button 
appears only when the second call is an incoming call. 

To dial another number while a call is in progress: 

1 . Place the first call on hold. 

2. From the Active Call view, repeatedly press PhoneBook to access 
the view you want to use. 



Tip: You can also tap the Speed Dial, Dial Pad, Contacts, or Call History 
view icons. 

3. Dial the number. 

4. When the confirmation message appears, hold Option and press 
Return *J for Yes. 

To use 3-way calling: 

1. Place two calls. 

Note: You cannot initiate a 3-way call if the second call is an incoming 
call. 

2. Tap 3-way Call, or press the button on the headset (if it is attached) , 
to join the two calls. 



102 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



7:38 pm 13 Till 

^ Midline Spear (W) On Hold 
1-831-555-6737 0039 

^LisaBest(W) 
1-650-555-5231 



r 



Hang 
l_Uf_ 



V 
V*. 

Call 



Spkr- 
. phone 



Mute 




Call 



7:38 pm [3 Till I 

^ Midline Spear (W) tcnf.cail 
1-831-555-6737 0102 

^ Lisa Best (W) 
1-650-555-5231 



Hang 
Up 



X 

Cancel 

3-way 



Spkr- 
phone 



Mute 



3. Tap Cancel 3-way to end the second call and to return to the first 
call you placed, or tap Hang Up to end both calls. 



Note: If the headset is attached, you can also press the button on the 
headset to end the second call and return to the first call. 



Checking voicemail 

There are several ways to access your voicemail mailbox. 
To check voicemail: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Do one of the following: 

> From the Dial Pad view, tap and hold the 1 button for two seconds. 

> From the Dial Pad or Speed Dial view, press and hold the 1 key for two 
seconds. 

• From the Speed Dial view, tap the Voicemail button. 

> From the Dial Pad or Speed Dial view, tap the voicemail icon in the 
title bar. 



Voicemail button 



7:34 pm 



13 Till 



1GZ1 2 AEC 



4ghi 5jkl 



J00 

^ (6mh° ] [clr] 



[7ty(s^J(9g 

000 



3. Close the lid to end the call. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



103 



Forwarding calls 

If you need to turn off the wireless mode or know you will be traveling outside 
a coverage area, you can forward your calls to another number. Keep in mind 
that airtime charges still apply to your forwarded calls. 



Note: Because call forwarding information is stored by the network, it's a good 
idea to check the current network settings both before and after you change 
the call forwarding option. 

To forward calls to another number: 

1 . From the Speed Dial, Dial Pad, or Call History view, press Menu ^jj} . 

2. Under Options, select Call Preferences (/A). 

3. Select the call forwarding option you want to use. 



Call Preferences 0 



Tap here to forward all , . „ .„,., 

r Forward all calls to: 

calls to a 1 — ^ Don' forward calls 

specific number 

Enable Digital Roaming 
B" Enable Location Privacy 

[ Gear Voicernail lean ] 
f OK ) [ Cancel ] 



Tip: You can define multiple forwarding numbers. Select Edit numbers from the 
list to add, change, or delete a 10-digit forwarding number. 

4. Hold Option ij and press Return ^ to finish. 

5. Listen for a confirmation tone. If you do not hear a tone, try calling 
yourself to see if the call forwards to the correct number. 

Other ways to make a call 

In addition to using the Speed Dial, Contacts, Dial Pad, and Call History views, 

you can also place calls in the following ways: 

». Redialing the last number 

». Returning a missed call 

». Dialing an emergency number 



104 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Redialing the last number 

You can redial the last number you called. 

To redial the last number, do one of the following: 

». Press and hold PhoneBook for at least one second. 
». From PhoneBook, press and hold the rocker switch. 

Returning a missed call 

When your PCS Treo 300 is on and you remain in a coverage area, any 
calls you miss appear in the Call History list and you receive a missed call 
alert message. When your phone is off or you travel outside a coverage 
area, your calls are forwarded to voicemail and they do not appear in the 
Call History list. 

». If you miss multiple calls, a message appears indicating the number 
of calls you missed. Tap View List to jump to the Call History view. 
See page 95 for instructions on calling a number in your Call History 
list. 

». If you miss a single call, the following screen appears: 



Tap OK to 
dismiss the call 
without calling 
back ~~ 



Vdu missed a call. 

Midyne(M) 
1-831-555-6737 
5:49 pm 8/25/01 



✓ 

OK 



(all 
Back 



Tap Call Back 
to dial the 
"number 



Note: If the caller's phone number is not available, the Call Back button 
does not appear on the Missed Call screen. 



Calling an emergency number 

If your phone is locked, you don't need to unlock your phone to call an 
emergency number. Simply dial 911 from the Dial Pad view. 

To call an emergency number: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Press PhoneBook . 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



105 



3. From the Unlock Wireless Mode screen or Unlock Communicator 
screen, tap Make Emergency Call to access the Dial Pad view. 

4. Dial 911, *2 (Sprint Customer Care), or any of the three emergency 
numbers you defined in Security Preferences. See page 111 for 
information on entering emergency numbers. 



Unlock Wireless Mode 0 



Enter passuiord: , 



[ Cancel ) [ Moke Emergency tiaiij- 



Tap Make 
Emergency 
-Call 



Unlock Communicator 



Enter passuiord: 



[ Make Emergency tiaiij 



5. When the E91 1 Callback Mode dialog appears, tap Exit Mode to 
return to your phone to normal operations, or tap Cal I Back 91 1 to 

redial the 911 operator. 

PhoneBook menus 

PhoneBook menus are shown here for your reference, and PhoneBook 
features that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. The 
Record and Options menus differ depending on which view is active. 



106 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Record menus 



c 


Record 


Edit Options \ 




New Contact 

Open Contact SO 

Duplicate Contact 




Beam Contact 
Beam Category 
Beam Business Card 



Contacts list view 



Options 



Edit Contact... 


SI 


New Contact... 


✓N 


Delete Contact... 


✓D 


Duplicate Contact 


ST 


Eteurn Contact 


SB 


RttachNote 


SR 


Delete Note... 


SO 


Select Business Card. 




Beam Business Card 


SKI 



Contacts record view 



Options menus 



1 Edit EgFQnil] 




Ringer Preferences... 


■^R 




Call Preferences... 






Security Preferences... 






Phone Info 


■^1 




About PhoneBook 





Dial Pad & Speed Dial views 



1 Record EUES 




Font 


Sf 




Ringer Preferences... 


SR 




Call Preferences... 


SR 




Security Preferences... 


St 




Phone Info 


SI 




Rbout PhoneBook 





Call History view 



I Edit Options 



SI 



Delete Contact... 


SD 


Duplicate Contact 


ST 


Beam Contact 


SB 


RttachNote 


SB 


Delete Note... 


SO 


Select Business Card. 




Beam Business Card 


SM 



Contacts edit view 



[ 


Record 


Options | 




Dial SI 
Details ST 
Delete Item SD 

Purge... 





Call History view 



| Record Edit |flpB!3 

I Font... 

Preferences... SB. 
Dial Preferences... SZ 
Rename Custom Fields... 
Security... SW 
Rbout PhoneBook 



Contacts view 



| Record Edit |flpB!3 

I Font... ~pT 
Rename Custom Fields... 
Rbout PhoneBook 



Contacts record & edit views 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



107 



Preferences 



Contacts View Preferences 



□ Remember last category 
List By: 



Last Name, First Name 



I First Marine, Last Marine | 
[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



Remember last category. Determines how the Contacts 
list appears when you return to it from another 
application. If you select this check box, the Contacts list 
shows the last category you selected. If you clear it, the 
Contacts list displays the All category. 
p- List By. Determines how the Contact entries are sorted in 
the Contacts view, and also controls the PhoneBook 
Instant Lookup feature. 



108 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Call 

Preferences 



(all Preferences 



Forward all calls to: 
•w Don't forward call; 



psf Enable Digital Roaming 
F5f Enable Location Privacy 

[ Gear Voicemail lean ] 



f OK ) [ Cancel j 



Enable Digital Roaming. Enables you to access wireless 
service from any 1900Mhz network when you are outside a 
PCS coverage area. If you place calls while roaming 
outside a PCS coverage area, you will incur roaming 
charges (if applicable to your service plan). 
Enable Location Privacy. Prevents applications on your 
phone from using information about your location. For 
instance, a wireless directory application might use your 
location information to provide you with a listing for a 
store that is closest to you without requiring you to enter 
your city, state, or zip code. For safety reasons, 911 calls 
always include location information even if you enable 
this privacy option. 
». Clear Voicemail Icon. Enables you to clear the voicemail 
icon when it persists after you've checked all your 
messages. Before using this option, first make sure that 
you've listened to all your voicemail messages, next try 
turning wireless mode on and off, if the icon still appears, 
then use this option. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Dial 

Preferences 



Dial Preferences 



t Phone 

t Treo Mail flpp 

■»■ SMS 



Dial: 
Email 
SMS: 
Home country: 

^ United States 
□ When dialing, add this area 

code to 7 digit numbers: 

Always dial 1 in front of 
the area code 



[ OK ] [Cancel] 



Rename 
Custom 
Fields 



Dial, Email, SMS. Provides other applications access to 
PhoneBook's dialing functions. In most cases you do not 
need to change these settings. 

Home country. Determines if North American 
hyphenation conventions are automatically applied to 
phone numbers, and whether the following two options 
are available: 

When dialing, add this area code to 7 digit numbers. 

Inserts the area code you specify in front of 7-digit 
numbers before dialing. 

Always dial 1 in front of the area code. Inserts a I in front 
of 10-digit numbers before dialing. If you select a countiy 
other than United States or Canada, numbers are 
formatted exactly as they appear in the Contact record. 



Rename Custom Fields 



Create your own field names 
by editing the te»t an the 
lines below: 

CustomJ. 

Custom 2 

Custom 3 

Custom 4 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ' 



These custom fields appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen. 
Rename them to identify the kind of information you enter in them. 
The names you give the custom fields appear in all Contacts records. 



110 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Security Enables you to lock your phone and define emergency numbers. 
Prefs 



Security Preferences 0 



Wireless Mode Lock: 

& On Power Off 

□ Immediately 
Communicator Lock: 

□ Immediately 
Custom Emergency Numbers: 

Number 1: 
Number2: 
Number 3: 
[ OK ) (Change Password...] 



Wireless Mode Lock: Locks your phone and requires you to enter a 
password to make outgoing calls (other than emergency numbers) . 
Thedefaultpasswordisthelastfourdigitsofyourphonenumber.You 
can still receive incoming calls and view your data in handheld 
mode. 

». On Power Off. Locks wireless mode each time you turn off 
your phone. 

». Immediately. Locks wireless mode upon exiting this dialog 
box. 

Communicator Lock: Locks your phone upon exiting this dialog box. 
When Communicator Lock is on, you must enter a password to view 
your data in handheld mode and to make outgoingcalls (other than 
emergency numbers). You can still receive incoming calls. The 
default password is the last four digits of your phone number. 



Important: If you use Communicator Lock to lock your 
phone, you must enter the exact password to re- 
activate your phone. If you forget the password, you 
need to perform a hard reset to resume using your 
phone. Performing a hard reset deletes all the records 
in your phone; however, you can restore all previously 
synchronized data atthe next HotSync operation. See 
page 235 for details. Note that performing a hard reset 
provides access only to handheld mode. To resume 
using wireless mode, you must contact Sprint to obtain 
the unlock code. 



Custom Emergency Numbers. Enables you to define three numbers 
that you can dial manually when your phone is locked. 
Change Password. Enables you to change the default password. 

Section 6 
Application-Specific Tasks 111 



Phone Info 



Phone Info 



Phone Number: 650-5S5-26S4 
ESN: 6000020 
PRLRev: 10015 
Firmware Rev: 0,63 
PRI Checksum: 0x0000 

roin 

Phone Number: Displays your phone number. 
ESN: Displays your phone's Electronic Serial Number 
which uniquely identifies your phone to the PCS network. 
» PRL: Displays the version number of the Preferred 
Roaming List. 

Firmware Rev: Displays the version number for the mobile 
communication software on your phone. 
+ PRI Checksum: Displays information intended for Sprint 
support. 

About Shows version information for PhoneBook. 
PhoneBook 



112 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Date Book Plus 

When you open Date Book Plus, the screen shows the current date and a 
list of times for a normal business day. 

Working in Day View 

Day View shows an hourly calendar for a particular date. If there are 
events scheduled on that date, they appear in the appropriate time slot. 

To view or select a date, do one of the following: 

Use the scroll buttons or roll the rocker switch to move forward or 
backward one day at a time. 



Note: By default, Date Book Plus scrolls through all the events in the 
selected day before moving to the next day. You can change this option in 
the Day Options dialog box. See page 133 for details. 

Press Shift CiJ and then a scroll button to scroll by weeks. 
■ Tap the day of the week that you want in the date bar at the top of the 
screen. If necessary, tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows 
to move to another week. 

Previous week , , Next week 



jui 24. o;MHE1H' HHHDB 


Tap to select a 


8:00 I I 


9:00 | 


day of the 




current week 



Press Menu and under Options select Go to Day (/O). To scroll 
by days, press a scroll button. To scroll by months, hold Shift GS3 
and press a scroll button. To scroll by years hold Option i _ and press 
a scroll button. After you scroll to the date, press Space to 
select it. You can also type the number of the day or tap the screen to 
select a date from the calendar. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Previous year 



-4 2002 ►- 



| Jan | Feb 


Mar 


flpr 


May 


Jun 




Sep 


Oct 


Nov 


Dec 



S IY1 T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

H 15 16 17 18 19 20 

21 22 23 @£D 25 26 27 

28 29 30 31 



Today 



- Next year 
Tap to select a month 

Tap to select a day 



Tap to select 
current date 



Scheduling an event 

A record in Date Book Plus is called an "event." An event can be any kind 
of activity that you associate with a day. You can enter a new event on any 
of the available time lines. When you schedule an event, its description 
appears on the time line, and its duration is automatically set to one 
hour. You can easily change the start time and duration for any event. 



Note: It's possible to schedule events that overlap, but Date Book Plus 
makes it easy to find such conflicts. See page 126 for details. 

You can also schedule events that occur on a particular date but have no 
specific start or end times, such as birthdays, holidays, and anniversaries. 
These are referred to as "untimed events." Untimed events appear at the 
top of the list of times, marked with a diamond. You can have more than 
one untimed event on a particular date. 

You can also schedule a repeating event, such as a weekly meeting, and 
continuous events, such as a three-day conference or a vacation. 

To schedule an event: 

1 . Select the date on which you want to schedule the event as described 
in the previous section. 

2. Type the time the event begins to open the Set Time dialog box. For 
example, type 4 for 4:00. 



114 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Start Time 




Tap to scroll to earlier hours 



Tap to change hours 

Tap to change minutes 

Tap to scroll to later hours 

3. If the event is longer than an hour, press the bottom scroll button 
and type the end time. 

4. Hold Option C 1 and press Return \J to finish. 

5. Enter a description of the event. You can enter up to 255 characters. 



maa < -**. a h i* 



Event description 

Time bar shows 
duration 



8:00 
9:00 



10:00 
11:00 
12:00, 



2:00, 
3:00, 
1:00, 
E:00 p 
6:00, 



P I an nin g □m m t i ncj 



|:::|ssi|MM=l (Fliwl [ Detoils ) [Go] 



6. Tap a blank area of the screen to deselect the event. A vertical line 
appears next to the time, indicating the duration of the event. 

To schedule an untimed event: 

1 . Select the date on which you want to schedule the event. See page 
113 for details. 

2. Press Menu £pg>. 

3. Under Record, select New Appointment (/N). 

4. Hold Option O and press Return +j so that no start or end times 
are defined for the new event. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Set Time 0 









Start Time: 


12P+ 




■00 




1 l 






05 






2 




10 




End Time: 


3 




15 




1 I 


A 




20 






5 




25 






t 




■30 




f nil Day ] 


7 




35 






8 




40 




[ No Time ] 






45 






10 




50 




[OK ] [ Cancel ] 


II 




55 











Tip: You can also create a new untimed event by making sure no event is 
selected and then entering a description. 



5. Enter a description of the event. 



8:00 
9 00 
10:00 
11 00 
12:00, 
1:00, 
2:00, 
3:00, 
4:00, 
E:00, 
6:00, 



- |:::|sii|MM=l [Mew ) [Details"] [Go] 



New 

untimed 

event 



No time 
selected 



ihuj.h i~EnEnnn» 



8:00 
9:00 
10:00 
11:00 
12:00, 
1:00, 
2:00, 
3:00, 
■4:00, 
5:00, 



|i.r!;':i.^.r-!!?.hr | .i , ?.:iLr!r | *rl... 



-|"Mlill=l [New] [ Details ] [Go] 



6. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event. 



Note: If you create an event and decide later that the re is no particular start 
or end time, you can easily change it to an untimed event. Tap the time of the 
event in the Date Book Plus screen, tap No Time, and then hold Option 
and press Return O to finish. 

Rescheduling an event 

You can easily make changes to your schedule with your phone. 

To reschedule an event: 

1 . Tap the event you want to reschedule. 

2. Tap Details. 

3. To change the time, tap the Time box and select a new time. 

4. To change the date, tap the Date box and select a new date. 

5. Hold Option Q and press Return \J to finish. 



116 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Setting an alarm for an event 

The Alarm setting enables you to set an audible alarm for events in Date Book 
Plus. You can set an alarm to sound minutes, hours, or days before an event. 
The default Alarm setting is 5 minutes before the time of the event, but you 
can change this to any number of minutes, hours, or days. 

When you set an alarm, this icon £3 appears to the far right of the event with 
the alarm. When the alarm tone sounds, a reminder message also appears 
onscreen. 



Note: Make sure the ringer is on. Silencing the ringerturns off all system 
sounds, including alarms. When you silence the ringer, Date Book Plus alarms 
vibrate. 



To set an alarm for an event: 

1 . Tap the event to which you want to assign an alarm. 

2. Tap Details. 

3. Tap the Alarm check box to select it. 

4. Tap the pick list to select Minutes, Hours, or Days. 

5. Select the 5 and enter any number from 0 to 99 (inclusive) as the number 
of time units. 



Event Details 


0 


Enter number of time 


Time: : 8:00pm - 9:00 pm 
Date: i Wad 7/24/02! 




Rlarin: Si 
Repeat: None 
Private: □ 


r Minutes 


units here 
Tap hereto 


[ OK ] f Cancel ] (Delete...} [Note} 


select unit of time 



6. Hold Option and press Return Q to finish. 

Alarm for untimed events: You can set a silent alarm for an untimed event. 
In this case, the alarm triggers at the specified period of minutes, hours, or 
days before midnight (beginning) of the day of the untimed event. No audible 
alarm sounds for an untimed event; instead, the reminder message appears 
onscreen. 

For example, you set an alarm for an untimed event that occurs on February 
4th. If the alarm is set for 5 minutes, the reminder message appears at 11:55 
PM on the night of February 3rd. The reminder remains onscreen until you 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



117 



turn on your phone and hold Option C and press Return \j to dismiss 
it. 



To dismiss the alarm reminder, do one of the following: 

Tap 5 min, 10 min. 30 min, or Other to reset the alarm to notify you 
in a specified period of time. 
Press the top scroll button. 



Reminder & Snooze 



12:14pm 

, j"jv. Lunch meeting 

12:1Spm- 1:15pm 
Friday, i/ 18/99 



5 min 



f IClmin ) 
f 30 min ) 
f Other ) 



OK 



Scheduling repeating or continuous events 

The Repeat function lets you schedule events that recur at regular 
intervals or extend over a period of consecutive days. A birthday is a good 
example of an event that repeats annually. Another example is a weekly 
guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time of 
day. 

Typically, a continuous event is an untimed event such as a business trip 
or a vacation that continues for several days but doesn't occur at a 
particular time of day. 

To schedule a repeating or continuous event: 

1. Tap the event. 

2. Tap Details. 

3. Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog box. 



118 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Time: j 5:00 pm - 6:00 pm i 
Date ; Wed 9/2W01 ■ 4 ► 
Rlarrn: □ 

Repeat: iNonei 

Private: □ 

Type: ^ Float | Done | 

[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete...] [Note] 



Repeat 
box 



Change Repeat 0 



Day | Week | Month | YeoTl 



Tap one of the above 
buttons to set a repeat 
interval 



No Repeat 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



4. Tap Day, Week, Month, or Year to set how often event repeats. 
For a continuous event, tap Day. 

5. Enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the event to 
repeat on the Every line. 

For example, if you select Month and enter the number 2, the event 
repeats every other month. 

6. To specify an end date for the repeating or continuous event, tap the 
End on pick list and tap Choose Date. Use the date picker to select 
an end date. 

7. Hold Option _ and press Return Q to finish. 

After you schedule a repeating or continuous event, this icon Q appears 
to the far right of the event. 

Changing and deleting repeating or continuous events 

If you change or delete a repeating or continuous event you can apply 
the action to only the current event, to all instances of the event, or to the 
current event and instances that follow. 

To change or delete repeating events: 

1 . Select the record you want to change or delete. 

2. Tap Details. 

3. Enter the change. 

4. Hold Option i and press Return >J to accept the change, or tap 
Delete. 

5. Tap one of the following: 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



119 



Repeating Event © 



(j?) Apply this action to 

the current event only, 
to all occurrences, 
or just this and all 
following occurrences? 

[Current] [~flii~] [ Following) [Cancel ] 

Current. Changes or deletes only the current instance of the 
repeating event. 

All. Changes or deletes all past, current, and future occurrences of 
this event. 

Following. Changes or deletes the current event and all future 
occurrences of this event. 

Considerations for repeating or continuous events 

Keep the following points in mind: 

». If you change the start date of a repeating event, your phone 

calculates the number of days you moved the event. Your phone then 
automatically changes the end date to maintain the duration of the 
repeating event. 

». If you change the repeat interval (e.g., daily to weekly) of a repeating 
event, past occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the 
setting) are not changed, and your phone creates a new repeating 
event. 

». If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event (e.g., 
from January 14th to January 15th) and apply the change to All 
occurrences, the new date becomes the start date of the repeating 
event. Your phone adjusts the end date to maintain the duration of 
the event. If you apply the change to Current or Future occurrences, 
past occurrences (prior to the day on which you change the setting) 
are not changed. 

If you change other repeat settings (e.g., time, alarm, private) of a 
repeating event and apply the change to Future occurrences, your 
phone creates a new event. The start date of this new event is the day 
on which the setting is changed. Past occurrences (prior to the day of 
the change) are not changed. 



120 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



p. If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event 
(e.g., time), that occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon Q . 

Changing the Date Book Plus view 

In addition to displaying the calendar for a specific day, you can also 
display a whole week in graph or text format, a month, a year, or a list of 
your appointments, as well as the current time. 

To cycle through Day, Week, Week with Text, Month, Year, and 
List views: 

». Repeatedly press Date Book Plus <3 to display the next view. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



121 



To display the current time: 

1 . Tap and hold the stylus on the date in the date bar to display the 
current time. 



Tap and hold the date 

I 



jui 24. 02KIBISID ■ ■ DDBD 



8:00 
9:00 " 



Current time displays 

I 



5:03 pin ■ IBID wQQg 



8:00 
9:00 " 



2. Drag the stylus below the date bar and then lift it. 



Note: If you lift the stylus while it is still on the date bar, the menu bar 
appears. 



Working in Week View 

Week View shows the calendar of your events for an entire week. This view 
lets you quickly review your appointments and available time slots. In 
addition, the graphical display helps you spot overlaps and conflicts in 
your schedule. 



Event details 



Tap to show 
event details 

Week View 
icon 

Previous week 



Wed 7/2-1/02 1:00 pm - 2:00 pm 
Planning team meeting 


8:00 
10:00 
12:00 




















■ 














■ 




■ 








2:00 
1:00 
6:00 


















































I l:::|:::|:::|-| [Detailj](G 



EEL 



4 Week 30 



8:00 
10:00 
12:00 
2:00 
1:00 
6:00 



Su Mo Tu We Th fr Sa 

21 22 23 2-1 25 26 27- 



:::|:::|:::|i|[Detqil;)(Q[] 



Next week 

-Tap for that day 

Bar indicates 
earlier event 

Dot indicates 
untimed event 

Bar indicates 
later event 



122 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Tips for using Week View 

Keep the following points in mind: 

Tap an event to show details for the event. 

► Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to move forward or backward 
a week at a time. 

». To reschedule an event, tap and drag the event to a different time or 
day. 

». Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and have the time 
selected for a new event. 

► Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week View to move 
directly to that day without selecting an event. 

The Week View shows the time span defined by the Start Time and 
End Time in the Date Book Plus Preferences settings. If you have an 
event before or after this time span, a bar appears at the top or 
bottom of that day's column. Use the onscreen scroll arrows w to 
scroll to the event. 

Working in Week View with Text 

The Week View with Text shows an entire week with a description of each 
scheduled event. This view can display one or two weeks at a time and 
can include To Do items that are due on the dates shown. 



Toggle between 
1 and 2 weeks 



Week View with 
Text icon ~~ 



B3E3Z 



10:00a Staff meeti 
12:00p Lunch with L 



nvite John to 
dinner 1 



5:00p Conference 
call with Japan 



JErE 



1:00p Planning 
team meeting 



1 



H-n;;;l;;;liircgT 



ins 



7:O0a Yoga class 
10:00a Marketing 
12:00pLunc(MW*4 
2:00p Reviej draft 
i:00p Pick u-JJfJH 



[HBuy wedding gift 



HnMH 



Scroll to 
more events 



Dot indicates 
more events 



Box indicates 
To Do item 



Tips for using Week View with Text 

Keep the following points in mind: 

». Tap a day to display that day in the Day View. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



». Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to move between weeks. You 

can also tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner to move 

forward or backward a week. 
». Press Menu , and under Options, select Go to Week (/0). Tap 

a number to select a different week. 
*■ Tap Go to open the date selector use the scroll buttons to select a 

week and then hold Option O and press Return Ji to finish. 
*■ Tap the number of weeks to toggle between a one week view and a 

two week view. 

Working in Month View 

The Month View screen shows which days have events scheduled. Dots 
and lines in the Month View indicate events, repeating events, and 
untimed events. 



July 2002 (27-31) 



4 ► 



Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Su 





1 


2 


3 


A 


5 


6 




7 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 


13 




H 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


20 


21 


_22" 


23 


24- 


2 
■ 




-26 


27 


28 


29 


30 


31 


























i 













- Previous/next month 

Dashed line indicates 
continuous or repeating event 

Dots on right or left side 
indicate events 

Dots below date indicate 
untimed events 



Month View icon 



You can control the dots and lines that appear in the Month View. See 
page 131 for details. 

Tips for using Month View 

Keep the following points in mind: 



Tap a day in the Month View to display that day in the Day View. 
Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to move between months. You 
can also tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner to move 
forward or backward a month. 

Press Menu , and under Options, select Go to Month (/0) to 

open the date selector and select a different month. 



124 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Working in Year View 

The Year View shows an overview of your calendar for an entire year. 



Description of 
event on 
selected date 



Dot indicates 

scheduled 

events 



EfBH"gj+ Staff meeting 4 ► 



flpr 



May Jun 



Jul Aug 



Sep Oct Nov Dec 



Blinking dot 
Jndicates 
selected date 



Year View 
button 



Scroll to 
other days 



Hps for using Year View 

Keep the following points in mind: 

► Tap a day to display the date and events for that day in the title bar. A 
minus sign indicates only one event is scheduled on that day. A plus 
sign indicates multiple events are scheduled on that day. 

► Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to move between days. You can 
also tap the scroll arrows in the lower-right comer to move forward 
or backward a day. 

Tap the scroll arrows in the upper-right corner to move forward or 
backward a year. 

Press Menu £2£> , and under Options select Year Preferences 
(/Y) to set display options. 

Working in List View 

The List View is a text oriented view that is integrated with To Do List. It 
displays a list of events and To Do items for the selected week(s). 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



7/22/02-8/12/02 



Mo 7/22 

Tu 7/23 

We 7/21 

Th 7/25 

Fr 7/26 

Mo 7/2? 

Th 8/01 

Fr 8/02 

Mo 8/05 

Fr 8/09 

Mo 8/12 



Staff meeting 
Lunch with Lisa 
Conference call with Japan 
Planning team meeting 
Invite John to dinner 
Vaga class 
Dinner with Greg 
Staff meeting 
Training class 
Vaga class 
Training class 
Staff meeting 
Vaga class 
Staff meeting 



Scroll to 
other weeks 



| [Details ] (Go] [Prefs 



List View button 



Tips for using List View 

Keep the following points in mind: 

Tap a line to select it. The start and end time display briefly in the 
title bar. To redisplay the event details, tap to the left of the 
description. 

»> Tap the description of the selected line to display the event in Day 
View. 

► Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to select specific items on the 
screen. You can also tap the up scroll arrow in the upper-right corner 
to jump forward by one of the following: 1 Day, 1 Week, 1 Month, or 
Pick (a specific date). Then tap the scroll arrows to move forward or 
backward a week. 

* Press Menu fszm , and under Options, select Go to Date (/O) to 
open the date selector and select a different date. 

». Press Menu tr^a> , and under Options, select List View 
Preferences (/L) to set display options. 

Spotting event conflicts 

With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event, it's 
possible to schedule events that overlap (an event that starts before a 
previous event finishes) . 

An event conflict (time overlap) appears in the Week View as overlapping 
bars. The Day View displays overlapping brackets to the left of the 
conflicting times. 



126 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



mm. 



4 Week 33 ► 



3:00 
10:00 
12:00 
2:00 
1:00 
6:00 



Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa 
11 12 13 M 15 16 17 



:::N||i|[Detoili]CS?J 



. Event 
conflict 



nug 16.02 MBBI0B1H r S 



7:00 Yoga class 

8:00 

9:00 

10:00 Sraff, meejjng.,.. 
10:30 Dentist opjjit. 
11:30 
12:00, 

1:00, 

2:00, 

3:00, 

1:00, 



- |:::|sii|MM=l (New l f Details ) (go) 



Working with floating events 

Date Book Plus can include events that are a combination of a To Do 
item and a Date Book event. These events are called "floating events." 
Floating events are not assigned to a specific date, but can still be timed 
or untimed, can have alarms, and can repeat. If a floating event is not 
completed by midnight, it automatically advances to the next day until 
you mark it complete. 

You can distinguish a floating event from an integrated To Do item by 
the circle that appears next to the floating event (in place of the To Do 
item priority number and check box) . Floating events appear in 
alphabetical order at the top of the Day View screen between any 
integrated To Do items and untimed events. 

To create a floating event: 

1. From the Day View, press Menu 

2. Under Record, select New Floating Event. 

3. Enter a description of the event. 

4. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the floating event. 

To mark a floating event complete: 

► Tap the circle to the right or left of the event. 

Tips for using floating events: 

». To prioritize floating events, enter a number followed by a space or 
dash as the first few characters of the description. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



127 



». To convert an existing event to a floating event, select the event, tap 

Details, tap Float as the Type, and then hold Option 1 and press 

Return \J to finish. 
». When you complete a repeating floating event, it marks only the 

current occurrence of the event as complete. 
». Avoid scheduling a floating event that repeats daily. These events can 

accumulate quickly unless you complete them each day. 
». When viewing a floating event in a desktop application, the Note 

field will contain a series of characters: ##f @ @ @ @ @ @ for an 

incomplete event and ##c@@@@@@ for a complete event. Do 

not remove or edit these characters. 

Working with To Do items 

Date Book Plus can create and display To Do items. To Do items appear 
in priority order at the top of the Day View screen. 

To create To Do items in Date Book Plus: 

1. From the Day View, press Menu ipsa. 

2. Under Record, select New To Do (/T). 

3. Enter a description of the To Do item. 

4. Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the item. 

To mark a To Do item complete: 

► Tap the check box next to the item. 

Tips for using To Do items: 

». When you create a To Do item in Date Book Plus, the priority and 

category are based on the settings in the Create Options dialog box. 

See the section that begins on page 135 for details. 
». If a To Do item does not appear in Date Book Plus, confirm that the 

category assigned to the item is selected. See the section that begins 

on page 135 for details. 
». If you do not complete a To Do item on or before the due date, then 

an ! (exclamation mark) appears next to the item as a reminder that 

it is overdue. 



128 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Using the Daily Journal 

You can use the Daily Journal feature to record events as they occur. 
Events are recorded with automatic time-stamping as Date Book Plus 
Notes so they do not clutter your schedule. The Daily Journal is especially 
useful for tracking activities such as sales calls, start and end times for 
consulting or other work, or keeping a record of how you spend your time 
at the office. 

To create a Daily Journal entry: 

1. From the Day View, press Menu 

2. Under Record, select New Journal Entry (/J). 

Date Book Plus creates an untimed event, opens a Note for this event, 
and inserts the current time. If you've already started a journal for 
the current day, Date Book Plus opens the existing journal and 
inserts a new entry. 

3. Enter a description for the journal entry. 

4. Hold Option and press Return <J to finish. 

Using templates 

You can use templates to create a list of standard events. You can then 
select an event from this list and add it to your calendar. Since Date Book 
Plus saves all the event attributes, including alarms and notes, templates 
can really save you time when entering reminder notices or events that 
recur on different days and times. 

To create a template: 

1 . Select the event you want to save as a template. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Record, select tap Create Template (/V). 

4. Hold Option , : and press Return \J to finish. 

To schedule a template event: 

1 . Select the date on which you want to schedule the event. 

2. From the Day View, tap the time line that corresponds to the 
beginning of the event. 

3. Tap New and select Template from the list. 

Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Aug J 1 . 02 MBE0B1HH ; 




8:00 






9 00 


10:00 


11:00 


12 00, 


1:00, 


2:00, 


3:00, 
4:00, 






Floating Event 




5 00, 


To Do 




6:00, 


Daily Journal 






Template 




B 


Appointment 





Tap to create an event 
from a template 



4. Select the event from the Appointment Templates list. 

5. Hold Option C 1 and press Return <J) to finish. 

Date Book Plus menus 

Date Book Plus menus are shown here for your reference, and Date Book 
Plus features that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described 
here. 

See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 



Record menu 



| Edit Options 



New Appointment 




New Floating Event 


SI 


New To Do 


ST 


New Journal Entry 


Si 


Beam Item 


SB 


Duplicate Item 


St 


Oeate Template 


SV 


Attach Note 


sn 


Delete Item... 


SO 


Delete Note... 




Purge Items... 


SI 


Day View 



\T^^^^ win 

iDetnilsTI 



List View 



New To Do Creates a new To Do item and adds it to your Date Book Plus and To 
Do List database. 

Duplicate Creates a copy of the selected event and opens the Details dialog box 
l,em for the new event. 



130 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Options menu 



| Record Edit E 
Go to Day. 



SO 



Font... 


Sf 


Preferences... 


SR 


Rlarm Preferences... 


SI 


To Do Preferences... 




UnDelete from Archive 


Phone Lookup 


SL 


Security... 


SH 


Rbout Date Book+ 





Day View 



Go to Month... 


SO 


Preferences- 


SR 


Month Preferences... 


SM 


Security... 


SH 


Rbout Date Book+ 





Month View 



Preferences... SR 

Vear Preferences... SV 

Security... SW 
Rbout Date Book+ 



Year View 



Go to Week.. SO 



Preferences... SR 
Security... SW 
Rbout DateBook+ 



Week View 



Go to Week.. 


SO 


Preferences... 


SR 


Week Preferences... 


SVf 


To Do Preferences... 


ST 


Security... 


SH 


Rbout Date Book+ 





Week View with Text 



1 Record EEJ3EH 




Go to Date... 


SO 




Preferences- 


SR 




List View Preferences.. 


SL 




Security... 


SH 




Rbout Date Book+ 





List View 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



131 



Preferences 
(Day View) 




Start Time: | 8:00 am] » 



End Time: | 6:00 pm] ^ 



Event Duration: M:00 



WeekStart: ^ Sun 



Initial View: 




Button Views: ^Bffllga 

[OK] [Cancel] [ Display Options ] 

». Start/End Time. Defines the start and end times for Date 
Book Plus screens. If the time slots you select do not fit on 
one screen, you can tap the scroll arrows ▼ to scroll up 
and down. 

Event Duration. Defines the default duration for new 
events. 

». Week Start. Defines the first day of the week. This setting 
overrides the System Preferences setting for all Date Book 
Plus views. 

». Initial View. Defines the view that appears when you start 

Date Book Plus. 
». Button Views. Defines which views display when you 

repeatedly press the Date Book Plus button. By default, all 

views appear. 

». Display Options. Opens the Display Options dialog box 
where you can define the following options: 



Section 6 
132 Application-Specific Tasks 



Display 
Options 



Display Options D 



L*f Show Time Ears 

L*f Compress Day View 

FSf Show PM Label 

L*f Show End Times 

[vf Scroll before Day Move 

@T fluto-scroll Time 

□ Float Advance at Midnight 

@T Show Completed Floating Events 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



Show Time Bars. Activates the time bars that appear in 
the Day View. The time bars show the duration of an event 
and illustrate event conflicts 
Compress Day View. Controls how times appear in the 
Day View. When Compress Day View is off, all time slots 
display. When it is on, start and end times display for each 
event, but blank time slots toward the bottom of the 
screen disappear to minimize scrolling. 
Show PM Label. Displays a "p" after PM times. 
». Show End Times. Displays all time bars and time slots for 
end times of an event. 

Scroll Before Day Move. Determines whether the front 
panel scroll buttons will scroll up and down within the 
current day before scrolling to the previous or next day. 
Auto-scroll Time. Displays events based on the time of 
day when the Day View contains more than one screen of 
information. 

Float Advance at Midnight. Advances floating events to 
the next day at midnight of the current day. 
Show Completed Floating Events. Displays completed 
floating events. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



133 



Alarm 



Rlarrn Preferences 0 


Alarm Sound: 


w Alarm 


Snooze Sound: 


t Alarm 


Remind Sound: 


t Alarm 


Play Sound: 


t Once 


Repeat Alarm: 


t 3 Time; 


Every: 


S minute; 


Rlarm Preset: 5 t Minutes 


[ OK ] [Cancel ] 





». Alarm Sound. Sets the tone of the alarm. 

». Snooze Sound. Sets the tone of the snooze alarm. 

». Remind Sound. Sets the tone of the reminder alarm. The 

reminder alarm sounds when the snooze alarm is not 

acknowledged. 

». Play Sound. Defines how many tones the alarm emits 
before it stops. The choices are Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 
Times, and 10 Times. 

». Repeat Alarm. Defines how many times the alarm repeats 
when it is not acknowledged. The choices are Once, 
Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, 10 Times, and 100 Times. 

». Every. Defines how often the alarm sound repeats. The 
choices are Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 
minutes. 

». Alarm Preset. Automatically sets an alarm for each new 
event. The silent alarm for untimed events is defined by 
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the date of the 
event. 



134 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



To Do 

Preferences 



To Do Preferences 


e 


Show Categories: 




□ Unfiled 


1 


□ Business 


I 

1 


□ Personal 


T 


Priorities Displayed 'w 1-5 




Show Priority 




□ Show Completed Items 




□ Show Undated Items 




Show Dated Items 




t 0 Day(s) before Due Date 


[ OK ] [ Cancel J [Create Opt 


ons] 



». Show Categories. Displays the To Do items in the 

categories you select. 
». Priorities Displayed. Displays To Do items with the 

selected priority level. The choices are 1 only, 1-2, 1-3, 1- 

4, and 1-5. 

». Show Priority. Displays the priority level for To Do items. 
». Show Completed Items. Displays completed To Do items. 

Show Undated Items. Shows all To Do items that have not 

been assigned a due date. 
». Show Dated Items. Shows all To Do items that have been 

assigned a due date. 
». Days before Due Date. Defines the number of days before 

the due date that an item will appear in Day View as a To 

Do item. 

Create Options. Opens the Create Options dialog box 
where you can select the default priority and category for 
To Do Items you create in Date Book Plus. 

UnDelete f rom Restores the last event you deleted from Date Book Plus (provided it 
Archive waj store( j j n me Archive f;[ e ) you can select this command 
repeatedly to restore additional events. 

Go to Week Enables you to jump to a specific week by tapping the week number 
in the current year. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



135 



Week 

Preferences 



Week Preferences 



Time Format: ▼lip 
Display To Do: **- Top 
WeekStart: t Man 

[vf Wordwrap Single Entry 

□ Hide Untimed Floating Event: 

□ Shaw Journal 

□ Include Week Number: in Title 
( OK ] [ Cancel"] 



Time Format. Defines the format of the time display. The 
choices are No Time, lip, ll:30p, 23, 23:30. 
Display To Do. Defines where To Do items will appear on 
the Date Book Plus screen. The choices are Top, Bottom, 
and Hide. 

». Week Start. Defines the first day of the week for Week View 
with Text. 

Wordwrap Single Entry. Wraps text in cells that contain a 
single event to display as much text as will fit in the cell. 
Hide Untimed Floating Events. Removes untimed floating 
events from the Week View with Text display. 
Show Journal. Displays a Daily Journal entry. 
Include Week Numbers in Title. Displays the selected week 
number in the title bar. 



136 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Month 
Preferences 



Month Preferences D 



Show Timed Events 
FSf Show Untinned Events 
FSf Show Daily Repeating Events 
P?f Include Week Numbers in Title 
P5f Show Zero Duration Events 



[ OK 1 (Oincel ] 



Year 

Preferences 



Show Timed Events. Displays events that you assigned to a 
specific time. 

Show Untimed Events. Displays events that you assigned 
to a date, but did not assign to a specific time. 
Show Daily Repeating Events. Displays events that repeat 
each day. 

Include Week Numbers in Title. Displays week numbers in 
the title bar for the first and last weeks in the month. 
Show Zero Duration Events. Displays events that have no 
duration in the Month View display. 



Year Preferences 0 



[*f Hide Floating and Done Items 

□ Hide Untinned Events 

[*f Hide Zero Duration Events 

□ Hide Events-: » 0.5 Hr. 

□ Hide Daily Repeating Events 



f OK 1 [ Gjncel ] 



Hide Floating and Done Items. Removes floating events 
and completed To Do items from the Year View display. 
». Hide Untimed Events. Removes untimed events from the 
Year View display. 

Hide Zero Duration Events. Removes events without a 

duration from the Year View display. 
». Hide Events <. Removes events that are shorter than the 

time you specify from the Year View display. The choices 

are 0.5, 1,2, 4, 8, and 12. 
». Hide Daily Repeating Events. Removes events that repeat 

daily from the Year View display. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



137 



List View 
Preferences 



List Preferences 



Date Book: 

& flppt |5f Float FJf Done 

□ fllamis Only 

□ Repeat events only appear once 
To Do: Tflll 



Filter by Tent 

□ Find: 

Show: F3f Day Name □ Tinne 
[ OK 1 [ Cancel ] 



Date Book. Determines which type of events appear in the 
List View display. The choices are: Appt, Float, Done, 
Alarms Only, and Repeat events only appear once. 

». To Do. Determines which type of To Do items appear in 
the List View display. The choices are All, Not Complete, 
Complete, and None. If you choose either Not Complete 
or Complete, you also have the following choices: Dated 
& Undated, Dated only, and Undated only. 

». Filter by Text. Displays events that contain the text you 
enter in this field and hides events that do not contain 
this text. 

Show. Determines the type of information that will 
appear for each event. The choices are Day Name and 
Time. 

About Date Shows version information for Date Book Plus. 
Book* 



138 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Blazer 

If you can't hold the world in the palm of your hand, at least you can 
hold the World Wide Web when you use Blazer to browse the Internet on 
your phone's screen. To use Blazer, your service plan must include PCS 
Vision. 

Viewing web pages 

You can view web pages whenever you are inside a coverage area. If you 
are outside a coverage area, you can view web pages that are stored 
temporarily on your phone in an area called the "cache." However, if a 
page stored in the cache has an expiration date and it is past that date, 
you need to establish an Internet connection to view that page. 



Hp: You can tell whether you are inside a coverage area by looking at the 
signal strength indicator in the lower right corner of the screen. 



To view a web page: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Press Blazer <3 • 

3. Press Menu &&m. 

4. Under Go, select Go to Web Page (/G). 



Hp: You can also tap the Folder icon Q to open the Go to Web Page 
dialog box. 



Sprint PCS 

Group:: ^ Business Tools [Go~] 



Enter- Travel Shopping 
tainnnent 

$ 0 % 

Finance Messaging Games 



r 



1..11 



Folder icon 



Go to Web Page 



URL: 

hT.TE^/www.googje.corn 

| www. | .com | .net | / 
[ OK ] [Cancel] [<lenr] 



5. Enter the URL you want to view. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



139 



6. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 

While a page is loading, a Progress icon ^ appears in the lower 
right corner of the screen. You can tap links to other pages as soon as 
they appear. You don't need to wait until a page fully loads. To stop 
loading a page, tap the Stop icon ® in the lower left corner of the 
screen. 



Google 






Search thevVeh 






[Google Search] 






©2001 Google 
About - Search Tips 




Tap to go to 


i 


home page 


Mill <? > a is 


TSii 



7. Navigate within a web site, by doing any of the following: 

> To scroll through a page, use the scroll buttons or tap the onscreen 
arrows or scroll bar (if one appears) . 

> To move between elements on apage, such as fields, icons, or buttons, 
roll the rocker switch or hold Shift C^} and use the scroll buttons. 

■ To select an element on a page, move to the element and press the 
rocker switch or tap the element on the screen. 

> To move to between pages when no elements are highlighted, press 
Return to move to the next page or Backspace Q to move to the 
previous page. 



Tip: To view a list of web sites that are optimized for your phone, go to the 
home page, and then tap Web Portals. 

Working with bookmarks 

The Bookmark view makes it easy for you to get to web sites you visit 
often. 



140 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Viewing bookmarked pages 

Your phone may come with a few bookmarks already in place. You can 
jump directly to any of the predefined bookmarks, or to any pages for 
which you've created a bookmark. 

To view a bookmark: 

1 . Make sure wireless mode is on. See page 10 for details. 

2. Press Blazer <0 twice to access the Bookmark view [ff]. 

3. Tap the bookmark you want to view. 

_Tap to 
view 
more 
pages 



Bookmarks 


n2|3|l|5|h 




Handspring 

Welcome to Hand 


News 

National 


Weather 

Paris 


Directions 

to Karen's 


Traffic 

London 


Movie Listing 

Singapore 


Wired 

Tech stories 


Sports 

Giants Score; 






Oil [^to)CyiD Tsii 



blazer 



To load the browser's home page, 
tap on the Home icon below. 

Help 

MRU ool W\ 



Tip: You can also press the scroll buttons to scroll to other pages, and roll 
the rocker switch to scroll through the current page. To view the selected 
page, press the rocker switch. 



Adding bookmarks 

You can store up to 100 bookmarks and group them in categories by 
placing similar links on the same bookmark page. See page 144 for 
information on creating page categories. 

To bookmark the current page: 

1 . From the Page view, go to the page you want to bookmark. 

2. Press Menu . 

3. Under Page, select Add Bookmark (/A). 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



141 



handspring 

blazer 



To load the browser 's home page, 
tap on the Home icon below. 

Help 

■Fit] < >9fl 1 



New Bookmark 



Name: 

Hqndspnng 

Description: 



URL: I http://www.handspring.conn i 
Preview: 



Handspring 

Welcome to Hand 



[ OK 1 f Cancel ] 



4. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 



Tip: You can also add a bookmark by tapping an empty bookmark slot in 
the Bookmark viewand entering a Name, Description, and URLforthe 
page you want to bookmark. 

To define a bookmark: 

1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu c^m . 

2. Under Bookmark, select Add Bookmark (/A). 



Tip: You can also open the New Bookmark dialog box by tapping an empty 
bookmark slot. 



3. Enter a Name, Description, and URL for the page you want to 
bookmark. 



Bookmarks 



























Tap an 
-empty 
slot 



New Bookmark 



Name: 

Handspring, 

Description: 



URL: I http://www.handspring.conn j 
Preview: 



Handspring 

Welcome to Hand 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



4. Hold Option C and press Return Q to finish. 



142 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Editing bookmarks 

You can change the title, description, or URL associated with any of your 
bookmarks. 

To edit a bookmark: 

1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu f^a . 

2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E). 



Edit Bookmark List 



Title: Favorites] 


!". "JLT'Sfl stocks 




Mobile Web 






News 


















19 2Q <□ sn 

O *0 OwD 





- Tap a bookmark 



- Page icons 



3. Tap the page icons to navigate to the page containing the bookmark 
you want to change. 



Hp: You can enter or change the Title for any bookmark page. Use the 
page Title to create bookmark categories. For example, if you want to 
create a page with links to various investments, you might name the page 
Assets. 

4. Tap the bookmark you want to change. 

5. Enter the changes. 

6. Hold Option _ and press Return j to finish. 
Deleting bookmarks 

If your bookmark list becomes full, or you no longer need an entry, you 
can delete it. 

To delete a bookmark: 

1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu 

2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark [IE). 

3. Tap the entry you want to delete. 

4. In the Edit Bookmark dialog, tap Delete. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return <J twice to confirm deletion. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



143 



Arranging your bookmarks 

As your bookmark list grows, you may want to rearrange the entries or 
move entire pages. You can assign a title to each bookmark page and 
arrange the entries by category. For example, if you want to create a page 
with links to various sports scores, you might name the page Scores. 

To assign page category titles: 

1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu Cj^m . 

2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E). 

3. Tap the page icon to which you want to assign a title. 

4. Enter the title. 

5. Hold Option C and press Return ^ to finish. 

To rearrange bookmark entries: 

1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu c^m. 

2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E). 

3. Drag the entries to the slot where you want them to appear. 



Edit Bookmark List 



Title: FauojrJtesJ... 



Handspring 



Mobile YYeb 



1Z- 



m o <□ *□ 

«□ sO »□'»□ 

Cog 



Drag an entry to 
another slot or 
page 



Tip: If the new slot is full, the other entries move down one slot as the rows 
fill from top to bottom. If you drag an entry to a page icon, the entry moves 
to the first available slot on that page. 

4. Hold Option and press Return Q to finish. 

To rearrange bookmark pages: 

1. From the Bookmark view, press Menu c^m . 

2. Under Bookmark, select Edit Bookmark (/E). 

3. Drag the page to the slot where you want it to appear. 



144 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



A grey line appears next to the page when it is in drag mode. When 
dropping a page on the top row, the grey line appears to the left of the 
slot where the page will appear. When dropping a page on the bottom 
row, the grey line appears to the right of the slot where the page will 
appear. 



Drag a page to 
another slot 



Edit Bookmark List 



Title: Favorites 



Handspring 


Yahoo 


MSN Mobile 
















«□ <0 ?□">□ 



4. Hold Option _ and press Return Q to finish. 
Blazer menus 

Blazer menus are shown here for your reference, and Blazer features that 
are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 

The Go and Options menus differ depending on whether you're 
displaying the Page view or the Bookmark view. 

Page menu 

|~ I^!3"Go Options | 



Rdd Baakmark Sf* 



Refresh 




Stop Loading 




Properties... 



Page view 



Refresh Enables you to update the current web page with the most up-to-date 
information. 

Stop Cancels the process of loading a page, 
loading 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



145 



Properties Displays the Page Properties dialog box where you can view the Page 
Name, URL, Size (Bytes) and whether the page was loaded from the 
cache. 



Page Properties 



Page Name: 

Welcome to Handspring. com 

URL: 

http://www.handspring.conn/ 



Size (Bytes): 



Bookmarks menu 



Bookmarks 


Go Options ;! 


Rdd Bookmark 
Edit Bookmarks 





Bookmark view 



Go menus 

| Bookmarks Options 

| Go to Web Page f<j 

Bookmark view 



Options menu 

| Bookmarks Go EJ^ JS^j^T 
Blazer Preferences... 
Network Preferences- 
Disconnect 

About Blazer 



Bookmark view 



I Page Bg3 op tions 

Back SB 

Forward ST 

Home SH 

Go to Web Page S<i 

Page view 



| Page Go E>JlTu!S? 




Blazer Preferences- 
Network Preferences... 
Disconnect 


About Blazer I 



Page view 



146 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Preferences 



[ Browser | Advanced ] 



Home Page: i.^efOUl^ 
Initial View: 
Images: t 16 Shades of Gray (slow) 

□ flsk before establishing 
Internet co nnection 

□ Disconnect on Enit 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



Browser tab: 

». Home page. Displays the URL of the current home page 
selection. Tap this option to open the Set Home Page 
dialog box and select a different home page. To restore the 
factory default Home Page setting, tap Restore in the Set 
Home Page dialog box. 



Note: Some service providers may not support the 
default Home Page setting. 



». Initial view. Determines whether the Page view or 
Bookmark view appears when you start the Blazer 
application. The default option is Page view. 

». Images. Determines depth of color used to display 
graphic images. You can also choose to not display 
images at all. The options are: No Images (fastest), Black 
& White (faster), 4 Shades of Gray (fast), 16 Shades of 
Gray (slow), 256 Colors (slower), High Color (slowest). 
The default setting is 256 Colors (slower). 

^ Ask before establishing Internet connection. Displays a 
confirmation dialog each time you begin an Internet 
session. The default setting for this option is on. 

». Disconnect On Exit. Determines whether the Internet 
connection automatically closes when you exit the 
Blazer application. Leaving this option off enables you to 
switch to another application and then return to Blazer 
while you are still connected to the Internet. The default 
setting for this option is off. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



147 



Preferences 0 



[ Browser [ Advanced | 

Cache Size (K): 25S f Clear ) 
Free Memory: 750 9K of 
FJf Hccept Cookies 

( Clear Cookies J 

[ Set Proxy ] 
[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



Advanced tab: 

Cache Size (K). Displays the amount of memory that 
Blazer reserves to store recently viewed pages. The amount 
of free memory available on your phone appears below 
this option. 

Clear. Erases all the pages stored in the cache. You cannot 
cancel or undo this action. 

> Accept Cookies. Enables the receipt of Internet cookies. 
The default setting for this option is on. 

». Clear Cookies. Erases all the cookies stored on your phone. 
You cannot cancel or undo this action. 

> Set Proxy. Opens the Set Proxy dialog box where you can 
enter advanced HTTP proxy server settings. If your network 
requires you to go through a proxy server when you 
connect to the Internet, use this dialog box to enter the 
proxy server settings. Contact your system administrator 
for details. 

Disconnect Terminates your connection to the Internet. 
About Blazer Displays version information for Blazer. 



148 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Memo Pad 

A memo can contain up to 4,000 characters. The number of memos you 
can store is dependent only on the memory available on your phone. A 
record in Memo Pad is called a "memo." 

To create a new memo: 

1. Press <&. 

2. Enter the text you want to appear in the memo. Press Return <j to 
move down to new lines in the memo. 



Tip: The first letter of your memo is automatically capitalized. 



1. 11/22 Meeting Minutes 

2. Directions to Moscone Center 

3. Plans for conference 

A. Priorities on new project 
S. To discuss with Jose Ribera 



[New> - 



- Tap New 



[Done] [ Details ] 



3. Hold Option C and press Return y> to finish. 
Reviewing memos 

The first line of a memo appears in the Memo list. This makes it easy to 
locate and review your memos. 

To review a memo: 

1 . In the Memo list, tap the text of the memo. 



T HII 



1. 11/22 Meeting Minutes — 

2. Directions to Moscone Center 

3. Plans for conference 

A. Priorities on new project 
S. To discuss with Jose Ribera 



(New) 



Tap a 
- memo to 
review its 
contents 



W. I-!Q':M s on . t o stu d};'. .time... 



nn a n a q e m e n t p r o q r a m g s 

jmplementedbyempjo^ees... 



1 1/22 Meeting Minnies 



Micheje Poker to report on 
expanding nai I >'i ■■> 1 .'■ 
Fort Worth area. 



[Done] [ Details ] 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



149 



2. Review or edit the text in the memo. 

3. Hold Option _ and press Return to finish. 

Memo Pad menus 

Memo Pad menus are shown here for your reference, and Memo Pad 
features that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 

The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you're 
displaying the Memo list or an individual memo. 

Record menus 



| Options 



J 



| Beam Category 

Memo list 



I Edit Options 



New Memo SM 
Delete Memo... S\> 
Beam Memo 



Memo screen 



1 



Options menus 



| Record 



Memo list 



EliiEEi 1 | Record Edit IaIIU'i.M 


Font... 






Font 


Sf 


Preferences. 


✓R 




Phone Lookup 




Security... 


SH 




Rbout Memo Pi 


id 


Rbout Memo 


Pad 







Memo screen 



Preferences Displays the Memo Preferences dialog box, where you define die 
sort order for memos. 

About Memo Shows version information for Memo Pad. 
Pad 



150 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



SMS 

When you subscribe to PCS Vision Services, you can use your PCS Treo 300 
to receive and store short text messages. These text messages are similar to 
e-mail messages that you receive on your computer, but are typically no 
more than 160 characters in length. These messages can originate from 
any of the following sources: 
». The PCS voicemail paging system 
». The PCS messaging website 
». An email message addressed to your mobile phone 
number@messaging.sprintpcs.com. 

Receiving text messages 

When you receive text messages, the New Messages alert appears. The 
buttons that appear in the alert dialog box are based on the source and 
content of the message. 

Multiple message alert 



Single message alert 



New Message 



Chris tadiuell (M) 

PLEASE CALL 



8:24 pm 











X 






Call 




Delete 


OK 




Sender 







Number 
of new 

messages 

Most 

recent 

message 



4 New Messages 



Lisa Best (M> 8:19 pm 

From: 1 ^nnessagirig.^pr' 

Subject: 

Don't forget to check out the cool 
Treo accessories at 
www.haridspring.com 



OK 



*} 

Select 



Call 

Sender, 



X 

Delete 
Msg 



In the New Messages alert dialog box, you can save or respond to the first 
message by tapping any of the following buttons: 



OK 



Select 



Saves the message in the All category, dismisses the alert dialog box, 
and returns you to the previous application. 
Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to respond to the 
message. The options available change based on the content of the 
message. See page 153 for details. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



151 



Call 
Sender 



Delete 
Msg. 



Dials the number of the person who sent you the message. If the 
message was sent from an e-mail address or without a call back 
number, this option is not available. 

Deletes thecurrentmessage, dismisses the alert dialogbox,andreturns 
you to the previous application. 



Tips: 

». To view additional incoming messages, press Option ( and the 

press PhoneBook . 
». You can also dismiss the alert dialog box by pressing the rocker 

switch or the top scroll button. 

Viewing text messages 

SMS enables you to quickly view your incoming and saved messages. 

To view text messages in the List view: 

». Hold Option O and press PhoneBook <_> repeatedly to access the 
message category you want to view: All, Personal, Business, or any 
other category you've defined. 

Message category 
pick list 



Message 
header 



+ Fill 



Lisa Best (M) 8:19 pm 

From: 6505555231@messaging.spr 
Subject: Don't forget to check out 
the cool Treo accessories at 
www.handspring.corn 

From: 65u7773344@rnessaging.spr 
Subject: Hey, I forgot to tell you — 
that nny new mobile number is 
555-4567 

4155558794 CM) 8:16 pin 



[ Call ) ["Delete] 



Message 
"text 



152 



To view one message at a time: 

1 . Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to select the header of the 
message you want to view. 

2. Open the selected message by doing one of the following: 
Press Space • 

Press Return Q . 
Press the rocker switch. 
Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Messages 



Lisa Best (M) 8:19 pm 

From: 650555523 1@messaging.spr 
Subject: Don't forget to check out 
the cool Treo accessories at 
www.handspring.com 

From: 6507773344@nriessaging.spr 
Subject: Hey, I forgot to tell you 
that nny new mobile number is 
555-4567 

41 55558794 (M) 8:16 pm 



[ Call ] [Delete] 



Selected 
header 



Bffg Unfiled 

From: Claudia Knight (YY) 
Date: 3/ 15/02 8:18 pm 
From: 6507773344@messaging.spr 
Subject: 

Hey, I forgot to tell y ou that my 
new mobile number is 3 



[ Done ] [ Call ] [Delete] [ Next ] 



3. Use the scroll buttons or rocker switch to scroll within the current 
message. 

4. Press Option C ' and use the scroll buttons to next or previous 
message. 

Responding to text messages 

There are several ways you can respond to a message depending on its 
origin and content. You can respond to messages from the Message list or 
while viewing an individual message. 

Calling the sender 

When a call back number is available, you can call the person who sent 
you a message. When a call back number is not available, this option is 
disabled. 

To call the sender: 

1 . Select or open a message from the person you want to call. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Message, select Call Sender (/A). 

Selecting other ways to respond to text messages 

When a text message contains a telephone number, an e-mail address, or 
a URL for a web site, you can select these items inside the text message 
and launch the appropriate application to respond to that item. 

To select other the response method: 

1 . Open the message to which you want to respond. 

2. Press the scroll buttons or roll the rocker switch to scroll through the 
selectable items and highlight the item to which you want to 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



153 



respond. 



From: Claudia Knight (YY) 
Date: 3/19/02 8:18 pm 
From: 6507773344@messaging.spr 
Subject: 

Hey, I forgot to tell y ou that my 
new mobile number is 3 



[ Done ) [ Call ) [Delete] [ Next ] 



Selected 
item 



l.,itUJ. ■ J Unfiled 

From: 4155558794 (M) 
Date: 3/19/02 8:16 pm 
From: 41E5558794@messaging.spr 
Subject: 

Check out the new Treo cradle at 



ww.handspring.com 



[ Done ] [Browse] [Delete] [ Next ] 



Button changes based on 
"selected item 



3. Press Space c 
selected item. 



to open the application associated with the 



Copying text messages 

You can save time by copying text from your messages. 
To copy an entire message: 

1 . From the Messages list, tap the text of the message you want to copy. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Edit, select Copy Message (/C). 

4. Open the application where you want to insert the text. 

5. Press Menu 

6. Under Edit, select Paste (/P). 

To copy specific text within a message: 

1 . Open the message containing the text you want to copy. 

2. Highlight the text you want to copy 

3. Press Menu r^am . 

4. Under Edit, select Copy (/C). 

5. Open the application where you want to insert the text. 

6. Press Menu 

7. Under Edit, select Paste (/P). 



154 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Sorting messages 

1 . From any SMS list view, press Menu 

2. Under Options, select Sort. 

3. Tap the Sort by pick list to select the sort method you want to use. 



Tap arrow to select 
sort method 



Sort Options 



Sort by: y Date 



f OK 1 [ Cancel ] 



Date Places the most recent messages at the top of the list. This is the default 
sort method. 

Name Places mobile phone numbers at the top of the list in numerical order, 
followed by e-mail addresses and names in alphabetical order. 

4. Hold Option and press Return ^ to finish. 
Deleting messages 

You can delete a single message or a group of messages from a particular 
category. 

To delete a single message: 

1 . From any SMS list view, select the message you want to delete. 

2. Press Menu ffjBBfc. 

3. Under Message, select Delete (/D). 

4. If prompted, hold Option i _ and press Return Q to confirm 
deletion. 



Hp: You can also delete a message by selecting it and pressing 
Backspace ^ . 



To delete a group of messages: 

1 . From any SMS list view, select the category containing the messages 
you want to delete. 

2. Press Menu Citi ■ 

3. Under Message, select Purge Messages. 

4. Select the deletion method you want to use. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Tap arrow to select 
deletion method 



Purge Messages 



Purge InboK messages 

y older than 1 week 



(OK) [Cancel) 



Older than Deletes all messages in the current category with a date earlier than 1 

1 week weg k p r j or to me curre nt date. 

Older than Deletes all messages in the current category with a date earlier than 1 

1 month month prior to the current date. 

Except last Keeps only the 10 most recent messages and deletes all other messages 

10 in the current category. 

A" Deletes all messages in the current category. 



5. Hold Option Q and press Return Q twice to confirm deletion. 
SMS menus 

SMS menus are shown here for your reference, and SMS features that are 

not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 

See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 

The Message menu differ depending on which SMS view is on the screen 

and the type of data selected. The Options menu is the same in all views. 

Message menus 



I Edit Options 

Open 
Delete 



SO 
Call Sender 



Purge Messages.. 



1 



List view 



| Message 


Edit Options | 


Delete »"*D 
Call Sender SH 




Call SP 



| Message 


Edit Options | 


Delete St> 
Call Sender SH 




Browse 



| Message 


Edit Options \ 


Delete SD 
Call Sender Sfl 




Email St 



Open 



Message view 

Displays the selected message in single message view. 



156 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Options menus 


| Message Edit E 




Font .^F 




Preferences... 




Ringer Preferences... 




About SMS 



Preferences 



SMS Preferences 0 



Fif Confirm deletion; 
f OK 1 (Cancel) 

Determines whether a confirmation dialog box appears when you 
delete messages. 
About SMS shows version information for SMS. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



157 



To Do List 

To Do reminds you of tasks you have to complete. A record in To Do List is 
called an "item." 

To create a To Do item: 

1 . Press Option ' and then press Date Book Plus . 



Tip: You can also access To Do List by tapping the To Do List icon ^ in 
the Applications Launcher. 



2. Enter the text of the To Do item. The text can be longer than one 
line. 



New To 
Do item 



BEEL 



□ 1 • ill I ••:••!•: 

□ 1 Send flower; to Mom 
fiD 



[New] [ Details... ] [ Show... ] f- 



3. Press a scroll button to deselect the To Do item. 
Setting priority 

The priority setting for items lets you arrange your To Do items according 
to their importance or urgency. The default setting is to arrange To Do 
items by priority and due date, with priority 1 items at the top. If you have 
a number of items in your list, changing an item's priority setting may 
move its position in the list. 



Note: When you create a new To Do item, its priority is automatically set 
to level 1, the highest (most important) level. If you select another item first, 
however, the item you create appears beneath the selected item and is 
given the same priority as the selected item. 



158 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



To set the priority of a To Do item: 

1 . Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do item. 



EBZL 



□ 1 • ill I ••:••!•: 

□ 1 Send flowers to Mom 



[New] [ Details... ] [ Show... ] f 



nss. 



-Tap here 



r 



Tap to 
select 
priority 



□ 1 ■: nil [••:••!•: 



end flowers to Morn 



(New) [ Details... ] [ Show... ] 



2. Tap the Priority number that you want to set (1 is most important) . 
Setting a due date 

You can associate a due date with any To Do item. You can also sort the 
items that appear in the list based on their due date. 

To set a due date for a To Do item: 

1 . Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change . 

2. Tap Details. 

3. Tap the Due Date pick list. 



To Do Item Details 



Priority: Q 2 | 3 H | 5~| 
Category: ^ Unfiled 



Due Date: ■^No Date 
Private: □ 

[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete...] [Note] 



-Tap here 



4. Tap the date that you want to assign the item: 



Today Assigns the current date. 

Tomorrow Assigns tomorrow's date. 

One week later Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date. 
No Date Removes the due date from the item. 

Choose date Opens the date selector, where you can choose any date thatyou 
want for the item. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



159 



5. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 



Tip: If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Show options 
dialog, you can tap directly on the due date in the To Do list to open the 
pick list shown in step 4. 

Assigning a category 

You can associate any To Do item with a category. You can also sort the 
items that appear in the list based on their category. 

To assign a category for a To Do item: 

1 . Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change . 



Tap Details. 


Tap the Category pick list. 


To Do Item Details 0 




Priority: 11 2 1 3 M 1 5 I 




Category: y Unfiled 




Due Date: ^ No Date 




Private: □ 




[ OK ] [ Cancel ] (Delete...) [Note] 





Tap here 



4. Tap the category that you want to assign the item. 

5. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 



Tip: If you turn on the Show Categories option in the To Do Show options 
dialog, you can tap directly on the category in the To Do list to assign 
categories. 



Checking off a To Do item 

You can check off a To Do item to indicate that you've completed it. You 
can set To Do List to record the date that you completed the To Do item, 
and you can choose to show or hide completed items as described on 
page 161. 

To check off a To Do item: 

Tap the check box on the left side of the item. 



160 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



ran 






□ 1 Call David 

@T 1 Send flower; to Monn 


Completed To 






Do item 




[New J [ Details... ] [ Show... ) 









To Do Show Options 

The Show Options dialog box enables you to control the appearance of 
the To Do list screen. 

To change the Show Options settings: 

1 . In To Do list screen, tap Show. 



To Do Preferences 0 



Sort by: t Priority, Due Date 

@T Show Completed Items 

□ Show Only Due Items 

□ Record Completion Date 

□ Show Due Dates 
@T Show Priorities 

□ Show Categories 

[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



2. Select any of the following settings: 

Displays your completed items in the To Do list screen. If you turn 
off this setting, your To Do items disappear from the list when you 
complete (check) them. 

Items that no longer appear on the list because you turn off this 
setting have not been deleted. They are still in the memory of your 
phone. Purge completed items to remove them from memory. 
Shows only the items that are currently due, past due, or have no 
due date specified. When this setting is active, items that are not yet 
due do not appear in the list until their due date. 



Show 

Completed 

Items 



Show Only 
Due Items 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



161 



Replaces the due date with the actual date when you complete 
(check) the item. If you do not assign a due date to an item, the 
completion date still records when you complete the item. 
Displays the due dates associated with To Do items and displays an 
exclamation mark next to items that remain incomplete after the 
due date passes. 

Shows the priority setting for each item. 
Shows the category for each item. 

and press Return \J to finish. 
To Do List menus 

To Do List menus are shown here for your reference, and To Do List 
features that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 



Record menu 



[ 


Record ICTl 


Options j| 




Delete Item... 


SD 






Attach Note 


SR 






Delete Note.. 


SO 






Purge... 


SI 






Beam Item 


SB 






Beam Category 





Options menu 

| Record Edit ^yffffl 

I Font Sf~ 
Phone Lookup SL 

Security... SW 
Hbout To Do List 



About To Do List Shows version information for To Do List. 



Record 

Completion 

Date 

Show Due 
Dates 



Show 
Priorities 

Show 
Categories 

3. Hold Option 



162 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



CityTime 

CityTime enables you to display the day and time in your home city and 
in four other cities around the globe. Whether you're travelling or at 
home, now it's easy to keep track of the best time to reach your business 
associates, friends, and family in far away places. 

Note: CityTime does not automatically update the current time for Daylight 
Savings Time. 



Setting your home city 

The home city serves as a point of reference for your other city selections. 
The information displayed for all the other cities is based on the day and 
time in your home city. When you use CityTime for the first time (or 
when you travel or move to another city) , make sure you set your home 
city location. Setting your home city location ensures that CityTime 
displays accurate information for the other cities you select. 

To set your home city: 

1 . Press Option Q and then press Blazer <<3 • 



Tip: You can also access CityTime by tapping the CityTime icon @ in the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Press Menu 

3. Under Options, select Select Home City (/H). 

4. Tap the Home City pick list and select the city closest to where you 
are located. 



Hp: If a nearby city isn't in the list, you can use the Edit Cities command to 
add a new city to the list. See page 164 for details. 



5. Hold Option C ' and press Return -J to finish. 
Selecting remote cities 

In addition to your home city, you can display the day and time for four 
other cities anywhere around the globe. These other cities are called 
remote cities. 

Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



To set your remote cities: 

1 . Tap a pick list in the lower part of the CityTime screen and select the 
city closest to the city you want to display. 



Tap to select 


CityTime 


San Francisco 2:13 pm 




t New York 
J We5:13pm 


t Paris 

We 11:18pm 


a remote city 


t Tokyo 
Th 7:13am 


t flbberley 
We 10:13pm 



Tip: If a nearby city isn't in the list, you can use the Edit Cities command to 
add a new city to the list. See the next section for details. 

2. Tap the remaining pick lists and select the other three cities you want 
to display. 



Tip: You can temporarily display the day and time for any other city by 
tapping the city's location on the map display. 

Adding cities 

If the city you want to display is not in the predefined list, you can use the 
Edit Cities command to add it. 

To add a city to the list: 

1. Press Menu . 

2. Under Options, select Edit Cities (/E). 

3. Tap New. 

4. Enter the city name and other information. 

5. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 

CityTime menus 

CityTime menus are shown here for your reference, and CityTime 
features that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 



164 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Options menu 



^fl^^ffl Utilities 



Select Home City- 




Edit Cities... 


✓E 


Help... 




Rbout CityTime 


SI 



About CityTime shows version information for CityTime. 
Help Displays online help for the CityTime screens. 



Utilities menu 



1 Options 


Utilities 






Change Location... 
Sun Rise/Set... 



Change Opens the Change Location dialog box where you can select the city 
Location [q are mov j n g or travelling. Changing the location 

updates the system time and date. 
Sun Rise/Set Opens the Sun Rise/Set dialog box where you can view sunrise and 
sunset information for your home city. To view this information for 
another city, tap the C ity pick list and select the city from the list. To 
view this information for another date, tap the scroll arrows next to 
the date box. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



165 



Calculator 

Calculator includes two operating modes: Basic and Advanced. In Basic 
mode you can perform simple mathematical calculations. In Advanced 
mode you can access scientific functions and perform sophisticated math 
calculations. This section explains how to select the operating mode and 
use the buttons and menu options available in each mode. 

Selecting the Calculator mode 

The Toggle Mode command enables you to choose whether you want to 
work in Basic Calculator mode or Advanced Calculator mode. You can 
change modes at any time. 

To select the Calculator mode: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Memo Pad C_X 



Tip: You can also access Calculator by tapping the Calculator icon ^ in 
the Applications Launcher. 



2. Press Menu q*^ . 

3. Under Options, select Toggle Mode (/M). 



Tip: You can also toggle between Basic and Advanced mode by holding 
Option and repeatedly press Memo Pad O- 



Using the Basic Calculator buttons 

The Basic Calculator includes the following buttons. 

Clears the last number you entered. Use this button if you make a mistake 
while entering a number in the middle of a calculation. This button enables 
you to re-enter the number without starting the calculation over. 
Clears the entire calculation and enables you to begin a fresh calculation. 

Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value. If you want 
to enter a negative number, enter the number first and then press the +/- 
button. 



o 



166 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Places the current number in memory. Each new number you enter with the 
M+ button is added to the total already stored in memory. You can add either 
a calculated value or a number you enter by pressing the number buttons. 
Pressing this button has no effect on the current calculation (or series of 
calculations) ; it merely places the value into memory until it is recalled. 
Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it in the current calculation. 




Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory. 



Displaying Recent Calculations 

The Basic Calculator's Recent Calculations command enables you to 
review the last series of calculations and is particularly useful for 
confirming a series of "chain" calculations. 

To display recent calculations: 

1. Press Menu @km . 

2. Under Options, select Recent Calculations (/I). 



Recent Calculations 


e 


65 


* 


32. 




2080. 




2080. 


/ 


24. 








86.666667 


/ 


8. 




„ , 10.833333 




com 





3. After you finish reviewing the calculations, hold Option ■ _ 1 and press 
Return *J to finish. 

Using the Advanced Calculator mode 

The Advanced Calculator screen consists of three regions. Each region 
performs a different function to help you perform a variety of 
calculations. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Tap here to 

change 

views 




0 



View specific 
buttons 
change with 
"view 



Primary 
buttons 



available in 
all views 



Using the Advanced Calculator buttons 

In addition to most of the Basic Calculator buttons, the Primary buttons 
are available in all the Advanced Calculator views. The remaining 
buttons are available only in specific views. The information that follows 
provides an overview of the Advanced Calculator functions. For more 
detailed information and instructions, visit the website: www.radiks.net/ 
-rhuebner/parendoc.html 

Primary buttons 

Clears the entire calculation and enables you to begin a fresh calculation. 

£^ Clears the last digit you entered. Use this button if you make a mistake while 
entering a number in the middle of a calculation. This button enables you to 
re-enter the number without starting the calculation over. 
Enters an exponent symbol in the calculation. 

Opens the Constants dialog box where you can select a constant to include in 
the calculation. 

Opens the Store in which memory dialogboxwhere you can select the memory 
bank in which you want to store the current value. Advanced Calculator has 
ten memory banks. 

rfjfc Opens the Recall which memory dialog box where you can select the memory 
bank from which you want to recall a value. 



168 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Math buttons 

Squares the current value. 

Calculates the value of x raised to the y power. 
Calculates the value of a common (base 10) antilogarithm. 



Calculates the value of a natural (base e) antilogarithm. 
Calculates the reciprocal of the current number. 
Displays the integer portion of a decimal value. 
Calculates the square root of the current number, 
jtjg^ Calculates the inverse of x to the y power. 

Calculates the common (base 10) logarithm. 
Calculates the natural (base e) logarithm. 
Hj^fr Displays the remainder of x/y. 

Displays the decimal portion of a decimal value. 

Trigonometry buttons 

Calculates the sine of the current number. 

Calculates the cosine of the current number. 
Calculates the tangent of the current number. 



Calculates the hyperbolic sine of the current number. 
f^f. Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of the current number. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



169 



Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of the current number. 
Calculates the arc (inverse) sine of the current number. 
Calculates the arc (inverse) cosine of the current number. 
Calculates the arc (inverse) tangent of the current number. 
Calculates the arc (inverse) hyperbolic sine of the current number. 
Calculates the arc (inverse) hyperbolic cosine of the current number. 
Calculates the arc (inverse) hyperbolic tangent of the current number. 

Finance buttons 

Finance buttons enable you to find an unknown variable value based on 
a group of known variable values. For example, to calculate the monthly 
payment for a 30-year home loan of $100,000 with an annual interest 
rate of 8%, you would enter the following variables: 
». Payments/year = 12 

► N = 360 (30 years x 12 months) 

► APR = 8 

► PV = 100,000 

► FV = 0 

Using these variables, the answer would be -73376 per month. 
To solve this example: 

1 . Enter a value and then tap the corresponding variable button. 

Repeat this process until you've entered the following four variables: 
. N = 360 (30 years x 12 months) 
. APR = 8 
. PV = 100,000 
. FV = 0 




170 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



2. Enter 12 and tap the P/Yr button to enter the number of payments 
per year. 

3. Tap Edit. 

4. Tap the Pmt line and erase all values on the line including zero. 

5. Tap Solve. 

6. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 

You can use a similar process to solve other financial equations by 
entering four of the variables to find the value of the fifth variable. 



O 



Stores the current number as the total number of payments over the life of the 
loan. 

Stores the current number as the annual percentage rate of interest. 

Stores the current number as the number of payments per year. 

Stores the current number as the initial loan amount. 

Stores the current number as the payment amount. 

Stores the current number as the compounded loan amount including 
interest. 

Opens the Time Value of Money dialog box where you can modify values and 
solve the equation. 

Stores the remainingbalance, interest, andprincipal (amortization) based on 
the supplied values. 

Calculates a given percentage of a value. To use this button, enter a value, tap 
this button, enter the percent, and then tap the equal sign button. 
Calculates the change in a value by agiven percentage. To use this button, enter 
a value, tap this button, enter the percent, and then tap the equal sign button. 
Calculates the percentage of one number relative to another number. To use 
this button, enter the first number, tap this button, enter the second number, 
and then tap the equal sign button. 

Calculates the percentage required to get to one value from anothervalue. To 
use this button, enter the result number, tap this button, enter the starting 
number, and then tap the equal sign button. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Logic buttons 



® 
® 
® 



® 
® 
® 



Shifts the value to the left and fills the new places with zeros. 
Enters D in a hexadecimal calculation. 
Enters E in a hexadecimal calculation. 
Enters F in a hexadecimal calculation. 
Calculates bit-by-bit commonalities between two arguments. 
Calculates bit-by-bit unique occurrences in two arguments. 
Shifts the sign bit to the right in signed mode. 
Enters A in a hexadecimal calculation. 
Enters B in a hexadecimal calculation. 
Enters C in a hexadecimal calculation. 
Calculates the inverse of each bit of the argument. 
Calculates the exclusive OR between two arguments. 



Statistics buttons 

Adds the current value to the end of the statistics memory list. You can store up 
to 200 values. 

Calculates the mean of the values in the statistics memory list, 
gfc Calculates the standard deviation based on a population of n. 



^jfc Calculates the standard deviation based on a population of n-1. 
Calculates the sum of the values in the statistics memory list. 



172 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Calculates the square of the sum of the values in the statistics memory list. 

Opens theStatisticalDatadialogboxwhereyoucan view, edit, delete, andclear 

values in the statistics memory list. 

Displays the number of values in the statistics memory list. 

Calculates the factorial of any integral from 0 to 170. 

Generates a random number between 0 and 32767 and then divides this 
number by 32768 to generate a random fraction between 0 and .99997. 
Returns the number of combinations of n items taken m at a time. 

Returns the number of permutations of n items taken m at a time. 



Weight/Temp buttons 

Indicates the current value is entered in ounces. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to ounces. 
Indicates the current value is entered in pounds. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to pounds, 
s^fe Indicates thecurrentvalue isentered in US tons. Whenyou tap thisbutton after 

tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to US tons. 
iflK Indicates the current value is entered in UK tons. When you tap this button after 

tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to UK tons, 
^■k Indicates the currentvalue is entered in milligrams. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to milligrams. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in grams. Whenyou tap thisbutton after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to grams. 
ggL Indicates the current value is entered in kilograms. When you tap this button 

after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to kilograms. 
A Indicates the current value is entered in metric tons. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to metric tons. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in degrees Fahrenheit. When you tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to degrees 
Fahrenheit. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



173 



Indicates the current value is entered in degrees Kelvin. When you tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to degrees 
Kelvin. 

Indicates the current value is entered in degrees Celsius. When you tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to degrees 
Celsius. 



Length buttons 

Indicates the currentvalue is entered in inches. When you tap this button after 

tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to inches. 
£fk Indicates the current value is entered in feet. When you tap this button after 

tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to feet. 
^PV Indicates the currentvalue is entered in yards. When you tap this button after 

tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to yards. 
£9k Indicates the current value is entered in miles. When you tap this button after 

tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to miles. 

Indicates the current value is entered in nautical miles. When you tap this 

button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to nautical 

miles. 

Indicates the current value is entered in millimeters. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to millimeters. 

tff\ Indicates the current value is entered in centimeters. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to centimeters. 
Indicates the current value is entered in meters. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to meters. 

sfjlk Indicates the current value is entered in kilometers. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to kilometers. 

Area buttons 

rfjfc Indicates the current value is entered in square inches. When you tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square 
inches. 

dfEk Indicates the currentvalue is entered in square feet. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square feet. 

dftk Indicates thecurrentvalue is entered insquare yards. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square yards. 
Indicates the current value is entered in acres. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to acres. 



174 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Indicates the currentvalue is entered in square miles. Whenyou tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square miles. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in square millimeters. Whenyou tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square 
millimeters. 

Indicates the currentvalue is entered in square centimeters. Whenyou tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square 
centimeters. 

Indicates the current value is entered in square meters. When you tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square 
meters. 

Indicates the current value is entered in hectares. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to hectares. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in square kilometers. When you tap this 
button after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to square 
kilometers. 

! buttons 

Indicates the current value is entered in teaspoons. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to teaspoons. 
Indicates the current value is entered in fluid ounces. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to fluid ounces. 
Indicates the current value is entered in cups. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cups. 
Indicates the current value is entered in pints. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to pints. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in quarts. Whenyou tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to quarts. 
Indicates thecurrentvalueisenteredin gallons. When you tap thisbutton after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to gallons. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in tablespoons. Whenyou tap thisbutton 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to tablespoons. 
Indicates the current value is entered in milliliters. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to milliliters. 
Indicates the current value is entered in liters. When you tap this button after 
tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to liters. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in cubic inches. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cubic inches. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



175 



Indicates the current value is entered in cubic feet. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cubic feet. 
Indicates the currentvalue is entered in cubic meters. When you tap this button 
after tapping another unit of measure, it converts the value to cubic meters. 

Creating a custom view 

You can modify any existing Advanced Calculator view to create your 
own view. While customizing a view, you can change the button names 
as well as the button definitions. 

To create a custom view: 

1. From the Advanced Calculator screen, press Menu c^m . 

2. Under Program, select Export (/E). 

3. Tap the pick list and select the view you want to modify. 

4. Tap Export. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return Q twice. 

6. In Memo Pad, open the memo containing the definition you selected 
in step 3- 

7. Modify the definition, and then hold Option C and press Return 
0. 

8. From the Advanced Calculator screen, press Menu f^a . 

9. Under Program, select Import (/I). 

1 0. Tap the pick list and select the view you modified. 

11. Tap Import. 

12. Tap Replace to change an existing definition, or tap Add to create 
an additional definition. 

13. Hold Option ; . and press Return \J twice to finish. 




176 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Calculator menus 

Calculator menus are shown here for your reference, and Calculator 
features that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 



Options menus 



Recent Calculations S\ 
Change Mode... 
Rbout Calculator 



Edit Program ^ 



Change Mode... 
About Calculator 



Basic Calculator 



Advanced Calculator 



About Calculator shows version information for Calculator. 



Program menu 



| Edit 


Program 


Options \ 




Export... 

Import... ^1 
Delete View... 
Restore Defaults 





Advanced Calculator 



Export Opens the Export dialog box where you can select a view definition to 
export to Memo Pad. 

Import Opens the Import dialog box where you can select a view definition to 
import to Memo Pad. 

Delete Opens the Delete View dialog box where you can delete a user-defined 



Restore Returns all the view definitions to the preset default values. 
Defaults 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



177 



Expense 

Expense enables you to record the date, expense type, and the amount 
that you spent. A record in Expense is called an "item." You can sort your 
Expense items into categories or add other information that you want to 
associate with the item. 

To create an Expense item: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu (jjD to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the Expense icon 

3. Enter the amount of the expense . 



Cursor of 
new item - 




Tap New 



-Expense type- I 



(New] f Details... ) (Show...) 



4. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type from the list. 



T HII 



-Expense type- 
I 



$ 20,00 



(New) f Details... ) (Show...) 



-Tap here 



Airfare 


20.00 


Breakfast 






Bus 






Business Meals 






Car Rental 






Dinner 






Entertainment 






Fax 






Gas 






Gift: 






Hotel 






Incidental: 







Note: As soon as you select an expense type, your phone saves the entry. 
If you don't select an expense type, it doesn't save the entry. 



Tip: A quick way to create a new Expense item is to make sure that no 
Expense item is selected in the Expense list, enter the first letter(s) of the 
expense type, and then enter the numerical amount. This technique takes 



178 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



advantage of the automatic fill feature. See the section that begins on 
page 187 for details. 



Changing the date of an Expense item 

Initially, Expense items appear with the date you enter them. You can use 
Expense to change the date associated with any Expense item. 

To change the date of an Expense item: 

1 . Tap the Expense item you want to change. 

2. Tap the date of the selected item. 



1/11 Taxi 
1/11 Lunch 
1/11 Hotel 
1/11 Zar Rental 



$ 12.7S 
$ 98.25 
$ 127.38 



(New) f Details... ) (Show...) 



Tap date 



4 2002 ► 



Jan 


Feb 


MOT' 


Jul 


flucj 


Sep 



May 


Jun 


Nov 


Dec 



S IY1 T W T F S 

1 2 3 1 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

d 15 16 17 18 1? 28 

21 22 23 21 25 26 27 

28 2? 30 



[ Cancel j [ Today J 



3. Select the new date. 

4. Hold Option £ and press Return ^ to finish. 
Entering receipt details 

Expense provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item. 
These options appear in the Receipt Details dialog box. 

To open the Receipt Details dialog box: 

1 . Tap the Expense item to which you want to assign details. 

2. Tap Details. 



Receipt Details 



Category: t Unfiled 
Type: ^ Lunch 
Payment: t Unfiled 
Currency: ^ $ 
Vendor: 
City: 



Attendees: jWhjOuj 

[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete] [Nate] ^ 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



3. Select any of the following options: 



Type 



Payment 



Category 



See the section that begins on page 62 for details. 
Opens a pick list of expense types. 

Lets you choose the payment method used to pay the Expense item. 



If the item is prepaid (such as airline tickets supplied by your 
company), you can choose Prepaid to place your expense in the 
appropriate company-paid cell of your printed expense report 
spreadsheet. See the section that begins on page 182 for more 
information. 



Currency Enablesyou to choose the typeof currency used topay the Expense 



item. Thedefaultcurrencyunit is defined in the Preferences dialog 
(seepage 187) . Youcan also displayup to four other common types 
of currency. See the next section in this chapter for more 
information. 



Vendor and City Lets you record the name of the vendor (usually a company) 



associated with the expense and the city where the expense was 
incurred. For example, abusiness lunch might be atRosie's Cafe 
(Vendor) in San Francisco (City). 



Attendees See the section that begins on page 70 for details. 

4. Hold Option £ and press Return Q to finish. 
Customizing the Currency pick list 

You can select the currencies and symbols that appear in the Currency 
pick list. 

To customize the Currency pick list: 

1 . In the Receipt Details dialog box, tap the Currency pick list and 
select Edit currencies. 



180 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Receipt Details 



Category: t Unfiled 
Type: Lunch 

Payment: ▼ Unfiled 
Currency: 



Vendor: 

City: 



£ 

DM 

Edit currencies^ 



Attendees: ,',-.:•... 

[ OK ] [Cancel] [Delete] [Note] ^ 



Tap Edit 
currencies 



Select Currencies 



Select the currencies that 
display in currency list. 

Currency 1: -r United States 
Currency 2: t United Kingdom 
Currency 3: t Germany 
Currency A: w None 
Currency 5: ~w None 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



2. Tap each Currency pick list and select the country whose currency 
you want to display on that line. 

3. Hold Option O and press Return \J twice to finish. 

Defining a custom currency symbol 

If the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries, you can 
create your own custom country and currency symbol. 

To define a custom currency symbol: 

1. Press Menu em* . 

2. Under Options, select Custom Currencies (/Y). 

3. Tap one of the four Country boxes. 



Custom Currencies 



Create your own custom 
currencies by tapping on 
the country name below: 



! Country 1 1 
! Country 2 1 
: Country 3 i- 
i Country 'I I 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



Tap a 

"Country box 



4. Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to 
appear in Expense. 



Currency Properties 



Country: 
Symbol: . 



[ OK ] [Cancel ] 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



181 



5. Hold Option C and press Return \j twice to finish. 



Note: If you want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all 
Expense items, select the symbol in the Preferences dialog box. If you 
want to use your custom currency symbol only for a particular Expense 
item, selectthe symbol in the Receipt Details dialog box associated with 
that item. 



Show Options 

Show Options define the sort order and other settings that relate to your 
Expense items. 

To open the Show Options dialog box: 

1. In the Expense list, tap Show. 

2. Select any of the options. 



1/11 Taxi 
1/11 Lunch 
1/11 Hotel 
1/11 Zar Rental 



t Rll 



$ 20.00 
$ Ai.fi 



$ 98.25 

$ ijyi 



(New) f Details... ) (Show... ) - 



-Tap Show 



Show Options 



Sort by: t Date 
Distance: Miles 
@T Show currency 

[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



Sort by 

Distance 

Show 
currency 



Enables you to sort expense items by date or type. 

Enables you to display Mileage entries in miles or kilometers. 

Shows or hides the currency symbol in the Expense list. 



3. Hold Option 0 and press Return Q to finish. 

Transferring your data to Microsoft Excel 

After you enter your expenses into the Expense application on your 
phone, you can view and print the data with your computer. 

Note: You need Microsoft Excel version 5.0 (or later) to view and printyour 
Expense data using one of the provided templates. Microsoft Excel is not 
included with the PCS Treo 300 package. The procedures in this section 



182 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



also assume that you have installed Palm Desktop software as described 
on page 21. 

Creating or printing an expense report 

It is easy to view and print your Expense data in a Microsoft Excel 
spreadsheet. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



183 



To create or print an expense report: 



1. 



2. 



3. 



Perform a HotSync operation to transfer your latest Expense data to 

your computer. 

Do one of the following: 

Click Expense in Palm Desktop software to open Microsoft Excel and 

the Expense Report configuration dialog box. 

From the Windows Start menu, click Programs, Palm Desktop, 

Expense Reports, and then choose your user name. 

Click the expense category that you want. 



Expense Report 




Click to select 
Categories 



Tip: You can press Ctrl+click to select multiple categories. To print the 
expenses associated with all of your Expense categories, select All in the 
Categories group. 



4. If you want to define an end date for the expense report, enter the 
date in the End Date box. 



Note: If you do not specify an end date, all expense entries for the 
selected categories appear — up to the date of the last HotSync 
operation. 

5. Do one of the following: 

Click Print to display the expense report in the Print Preview window, 
and then click Print in the Microsoft Excel window to print your 
expense report. 



184 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Click Create to display a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing your 
expense data. Your data appears in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet form. 
You can enter information, make formatting changes, and save and 
print the file in the normal manner. 

Using expense report templates 

Palm Desktop software includes several expense report templates. When 
you use one of these templates, you can edit your expense data in 
Microsoft Excel. 

The templates have the extension .xlt and are stored in the template 
folder in the Palm Desktop software directory on your computer. To see 
what a template looks like before you use it, open the template in 
Microsoft Excel. For example, the template Sample2.xlt looks like this: 



i I ■ I s I ' I s I ■ I " I ■ ■ I " I » I m I ■» I " II " I ■= 




Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



185 



If you want to streamline or customize your expense reports, you can 
change these templates. For example, you can add your company name 
to a template. 

To view your expense data using a Microsoft Excel template: 

1 . Display your expense data in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as 
described in the previous procedure. 

2. Click Options. 



Expense Report Options 




Enter name and 
other information 



Choose expense 
template 



3. Enter name, department, and other information as necessary for 
your expense report. 

4. Click the Templates menu; then select an expense template. 

5. Click OK. 

Expense menus 

Expense menus are shown here for your reference, and Expense features 
that are not explained elsewhere in this guide are described here. 
See page 28 for information about choosing menu commands. 

Record menu 



[ 


Record 


Edit Options 5 




Delete Item... SD 
Purqe SI 





186 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Opti 


ons menu 




| Record Edit tiJUftaTTl 




Preferences... 


✓R 




Custom Currencies... 


St 




Rbout EKpense 





Preferences 



Preferences O 



@T Use automatic fill when 
entering data 

Default Currency: t $ 

[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



». Use automatic fill. Lets you select an expense type by 
entering the first letter of an expense type. For example, if 
you enter the letter "T," it enters the "Taxi" expense type. 
Entering "T" and then "E" enters "Telephone" which is 
the first expense type beginning with the letters "TE." 
Default currency. Sets the default currency symbol for 
Expense. 

About Expense shows version information for Expense. 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



188 



Section 6 

Application-Specific Tasks 



Setting Preferences for 
Your Phone 

The Preferences screens enable you to customize the configuration 
options on your PCS Phone Handspring'* Treo™ 300. 

In the Preferences screens, you can do the following: 

Buttons Assign different applications to many of the buttons and icons on 

your phone and the HotSync" cable. 
Connection Configure your phone for use with a HotSync cable, for infrared 

communication, or for wireless data communication. 
Digitizer Calibrate the screen on your phone. 

Formats Set the country default and the formats for dates, times, calendar, 
and numbers. 

General Set the current date and time, the auto shut-off interval, the Beam 
Receive feature, and the system, alarm, and game sounds. 

Network Configure your phone for use with a high-speed wireless data 
network. 

Owner Assign your name, phone number, and other owner information to 

your phone. 

Ringer Set the ringer volume level and vibrate settings and set unique ring 

tones for different types of calls. 
Shortcuts Define a list of abbreviations. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



189 



Viewing Preferences 

To open the Preferences screens: 

1. Press Option Q and then press Menu to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the Preferences icon 

3. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen. 

4. Select the Preferences screen you want to view. 

Buttons Preferences 

The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to associate different 
applications with the application buttons on the front of your phone and 
the HotSync button on the cable. For example, if you find that you 
seldom use Memo Pad and often use SMS, you can assign the button to 
start SMS. Any changes you make in the Buttons Preferences screen 
become effective immediately; you do not have to change to a different 
screen or application. If you assign a different application to a button, 
you can still access the original application using the Applications 
Launcher. 

To change the Buttons Preferences: 

1 . Tap the pick list next to the button or icon you want to re-assign. 



Preferences | ^^^^ 


Tap arrow to 


Select an application to 
customize each button: 

Rj PhoneBook 

^ ~ Blazer 

t DateBook+ 




show pick list 


[ Default J [ HotSync... ] 



2. Tap the application that you want to assign to the button. 



Tip: To restore all of the buttons to their factory settings, tap Default. 



190 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



HotSync Buttons Preferences 

The HotSync Buttons Preferences screen also enables you to associate a 
different application with the button on the HotSync cable. Any changes 
that you make in the HotSync Buttons dialog box become effective 
immediately; you do not have to change to a different screen or 
application. 

To change the HotSync Buttons Preferences: 

1 . From the Buttons Preferences screen, tap HotSync. 

2. Tap the pick list. 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



3. Tap the application that you want to assign to the button. 
The default setting for the button is the HotSync setting, which 
means the cable performs its normal HotSync functions. 

4. Hold Option Q and press Return <J to finish. 

Connection Preferences 

The Connection Preferences screen lets you create configurations for 
communicating with other hardware devices: PC, Modem, or Infrared. 
Configurations, or profiles, once activated are available to applications 
on your phone. The Connection Preferences screen displays a list of 
available configurations that you can select as needed. This list will vary 
depending on the software you have added to your phone. You can also 
define a custom Connection configuration to meet your specific needs. 




Customize the HotSync 
Button on the cable. 



(X) T HotSy " c 



Tap arrow to 
-show pick list 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Predefined configurations 

Your phone comes with the following predefined Connection 
configurations: 



[Preferences ^| I 1 


Rvailable Configurations: 




Wireless Modem 






Direct USB/Serial 






IR to a PC/Handheld 






Standard Modern 




[New...) ( Edit... ][ Delete] 



Wireless Enables you to connect your phone to the PCS network using the built- 

Modem ■ j 

m wireless modem. 

Standard Enables you to connect your phone with a modem on your computer or 
Modem laptop. 

Direct Enables you to connect your phone directly to your computer or laptop 
USB/ 

Serial ™^ l ' le ^ ot ^ nc ca ' 3 ' e ' When you choose this option, yourphone detects 
whether the HotSync cable uses a USB or serial connector. 

IR to a PC/ EnablesyoutoconnectthelRportonyourphonewiththeinfrareddevice 
Handheld Qn com p Uter or laptop. 



Connection Methods 

There are several types of device connections you can choose when 
configuring Preferences: 

Serial Defines the direct serial connection between yourphone and your desktop 
" 0 P '"' computer. It is used to perform a local HotSync operation when yourphone 

is connected by its serial connector to the cable. The cable is attached to a 

serial (COM) port on your desktop computer. 

Serial to Definesaconnectionbetweenamodemattachedtotheserialconnectorof 
Modem 



Auto 
Detect to 
PC 



your phone and a modem that is part of your computer or laptop. 
Defines a dynamic serial connection between yourphone and your desktop 
computer. Use this connection type with third-party applications that need 
to reconfigure the serial port when communicating with a computer. 



192 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Defines a dynamic serial connection between your phone and a modem. 
Use this connection type with third-party applications that need to 
reconfigure the serial port when communicating with a modem. 
Defines a direct serial or USB connection between your phone and your 
desktop computer. When you select this option, your phone detects which 
type of cable you have connected to your computer. 
Defines a direct serial or USB connection between your phone and a 
modem. When you select this option, your phone detects which type of 
cable is connected to the modem. 

Defines a connection between your phone's built-in wireless modem and 
a computer. 

Defines a connection between your phone's built-in wireless modem and 
a wireless high-speed packet data network. 

Defines the direct USB connection between your phone and your desktop 
computer. It is used to perform a local HotSync operation when your phone 
is connected by its USB connector to the cable. The cable is attached to a 
USB port on your desktop computer. 

Defines a connection between the IR port of your phone and the infrared 
device of your computer or laptop. 

Defines aconnection between the IRportofyourphoneandamodem. The 
modem can be attached to a computer or some other device containing an 
IRport. 

Setting an infrared to modem configuration 

The following steps demonstrate how to create a modem connection that 
enables IR HotSync through an IR enabled modem. This modem would 
then dial a modem attached to your desktop to perform the remote 
HotSync operation. 

To create an IrCOMM to Modem connection: 

1 . In the Connection Preferences screen, tap New. 

2. Enter a name for this configuration. 

3. Tap the Connection Method pick list and select IrCOMM to 
Modem. 



Auto 
Detect to 
Modem 

USB/ 
Serial 
to PC 

USB/ 
Serial 
to Modem 

Wireless 
Modem to 
PC 

Wireless 
Modem to 
Modem 
USB 
to PC 



IrCOMM 
to PC 

IrCOMM 
to Modem 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



193 



Edit 8 



Name: If: ■■■ r.-1-:-J^ri. 

Connection: t IKOMM to Modem 
Method 

Dialing: ^ TouchTone™ 

Volume: Low 

[ OK ) [ Cancel ] f Detail;... ] 

4. Tap the Dialing pick list and select TouchTone or Rotary. 



Note: Select Rotary only if your telephone service does not support 
TouchTone dialing. 

5. Tap the Volume pick list and select the speaker volume. 

6. Tap Details. 



Details © 



Speed: t 57..600 bps 
Country: ^ United State; 
Flow Ctl: t On 
Init String: 

I 



[ OK ) [ Cancel ] 

7. Enter the initialization string appropriate for your phone. 

8. Hold Option _ and press Return \J twice to return to the 
Connection Preferences screen. 

Digitizer Preferences 

The Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen. 
This is the same screen that appears when you start your phone for the 
first time. You can recalibrate your screen after a hard reset, or if your 
digitizer drifts. 



194 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Formats Preferences 

Use the Formats Preferences screen to set the country default and the 
display format of the dates, times, and numbers on your phone. 

Country default 

The country default sets date, time, week start day, and number 
conventions based on geographic regions where you might use your 
phone. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed 
using a 24-hour clock. In the United States, time is expressed using a 12- 
hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. 

All your phone applications use the Country default settings. See the next 
section in this chapter for information on customizing these settings. 

To set the country default: 

1 . Tap the country name pick list. 



Preferences 1 


t Formats 


Preset to: 


t United States 


Time: 


HH:MM am/pm 




\Q:AA am 


Date: 


▼ M/D/Y 




7/24/02 




Jul 21 2002 


Week starts: 


t Sunday 


Numbers: 


t 1,000.00 



2. Tap the setting you want to use. 

Time, date, week start, and numbers formats 

The Time setting defines the format for the time of day. The time format 
that you select appears in all applications on your phone. 

To select the time, date, week start, and numbers format: 

1 . Tap the Time pick list and select a format. 

2. Tap the Date pick list and select a format. 

3. Tap the Week starts pick list, and select whether you want the first 
day of the week to be Sunday or Monday. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Note: This setting controls the Day, Week, Month, Year, and List views in 
Date Book Plus and all other aspects of your phone that display a 
calendar. 



4. Tap the Numbers pick list, and select formats for the decimal point 
and thousands separator. 

General Preferences 

The General Preferences screen enables you to set the time, date, auto 
shutoff interval, the beam receive feature, and sounds for your phone. 
See the section that begins on page 15 for information on setting the 
time and date. 

Auto-off delay 

Your phone has an automatic shutoff feature that turns off the power 
after a period of inactivity. This feature conserves battery power if you 
forget to turn off your phone. If you find that your phone shuts itself off 
before you finish viewing information on the screen, increase the auto- 
off setting. 

To set the Auto-off delay: 

1 . Tap the Auto-off pick list. 

2. Tap the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature: 30 
seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. 



Preferences 


t General 






Set Time: 


I 5:56 prn 1 


Set Date: 


i 7/24/02; 


Auto-off after: 


t 2 minute; 


System Sound: 


t Medium 


Rlarm Sound: 


t Medium 


Game Sound: 


t Medium 


Beam Receive: 


t On 



Note: The Auto-off setting turns off only the handheld mode on your 
phone. It does not turn off your phone's wireless mode. So, you can still 
receive calls, e-mail and text messages after the automatic shutoff period. 



196 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



System, alarm, and game sounds 

Your phone uses a variety of sounds. The System, Alarm, and Game 
Sound settings enable you to turn the sounds on or off, and to adjust the 
volume level. 



Note: If the ringer switch is set to no sound, the ringer setting overrides 
the sound settings and all sounds are turned off. The system, alarm, and 
game sounds are used when the ringer switch is set to the ring position. 



To set the system, alarm, and game sounds: 

1 . Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level. 



Note: When you turn off the System Sounds, you also turn off the "chime" 
tones associated with the HotSync operation. 

2. Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level. 

3. Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level. 

Note: The Game Sound setting works only with games that are 
programmed to respond to this setting. Older games typically do not 
respond to this setting. 



Network Preferences 

When you activate the voice and PCS Vision services on your phone (see 
the Activation Guideiox details), the activation process automatically 
configures your phone to connect to the PCS high-speed data network. 
After activation, your phone is ready to access the Internet or send and 
receive data using the PCS settings and any Palm OS wireless 
application. Visit the web site www.sprintpcs.com for information on 
third-party wireless applications. 

Network Preferences let you configure your phone to connect to any 
packet data network that supports Simple or Mobile IP (Internet 
Protocols). Dialing into your ISP (Internet Service Provider) through a 
circuit switched connection is not supported at this time. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



197 



Connecting automatically 

To take advantage of the persistent data connections available on your 
phone, you can choose to automatically connect to the PCS high-speed 
data network whenever you are inside a coverage area and you turn on 
wireless mode. 



Tip: To connect to a Simple or Mobile IP template which you define using 
the Network Preferences screens, selectthe desired template before 
beginning these steps. 



To choose an automatic connection: 
1. 
2. 



Press Menu 

Under Options, select Preferences (/R). 



Tap check box 



Preferences 



Connect to the data 
-□ network when wireless 
mode i s powered on. 



[ OK ) [ ilaneel ) 



3. Tap the check box. 

4. Hold Option Q and press Return \J to finish. 

Creating a new packet data configuration 

A service template stores Network Preferences settings that you can save 
and reuse. Use the Service setting to create a new service template for 
your packet data configuration. 

You can create additional service templates from scratch or by 
duplicating another template you created and editing information. After 
you create a new or duplicate template, you can add and edit settings by 
tapping the Modify button which appears on the screen after you create 
the template. 



Note: You cannot duplicate the Sprint service template, and you must 
obtain a special unlock code from Sprint to modify the Details and 
Advanced Network Preferences settings. 



198 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



To create a packet data service template: 

1. Press Menu fps*. 

2. Under Service, select New (/N). 



[Preferences M EUi^M*!^ 




^ Service: L'ntjtjed 


Connection: ^ High Speed Wireless 




User Name: I Tap to enter name! 


Password: j -Prompt-! 


n 


[ Details... ] [ Connect ] • 



Enter name of service 
~ template 



A new service template (called Untitled) is added to the Service pick 
list and the Unlock icon ll appears at the bottom of the screen. 
3. Enter the Service name. 

To duplicate an existing service template: 

1 . Tap the Service pick list. 

2. Tap the predefined service template you want to duplicate. 

3. Press Menu ffpat. 

4. Under Service, select Duplicate (/L). 

A copy of the service template is added to the Serace pick list. 

Entering a user name 

The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log into 
your packet data network. Although this field can contain multiple lines 
of text, only two lines appear onscreen. 

To enter a user name: 

1 . Tap the User Name field. 

2. Enter your user name. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Preferences ^^^^^^J 


Enter your user 


* Service: Entitled 


1 

Connection: w Highspeed Wireless 


name here 


User Name: 1 Tap to enter name! 




Password: \ -Prompt-! 




n 




[ Details... ] [ Connect ] • 





Note: Most packet data servers do not accept spaces in the user name. 
Entering a password 

The Password box identifies the password you use to log into your packet 
data network. Your entry in this field determines whether your phone 
prompts you to enter a password each time you log into your network: 
». If you do not enter a password, your phone displays the word 

"Prompt" in this field and asks you to enter a password during the 

login procedure. 

». If you enter a password, your phone displays the word "Assigned" in 
this field and does not prompt you to enter a password during the 
login procedure. 

Note: If you are concerned about security, select the Prompt option and 
do not enter a password. 

To enter a password: 

1 . Tap the Password field. 

2. Enter the password you use to log into your server. 



200 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



t Network 



t Service: Untitled 

Connection: ▼ High Speed Wireless 
User Name: i Tap to enterrramr 

Passuiord: i-Prompt-i 



[ Details..?] [ Connect ] 



-Tap here 



Enter password here 



Enter a password: 



If you do not assign a 
password, you mill be asked 
for one when you connect. 



[ OK ] [ Cancel ] 



3. Hold Option Q and press Return *S to finish. 
Note: The Password field updates to display the word "Assigned." 
Selecting a connection 

The Connection Preferences settings tell your phone about the hardware you 
are using for remote data connections. Normally you'll use your phone's 
built-in wireless modem to establish a data connection, but you can also use 
the infrared port or connect an external modem to the USB port. See the 
section that begins on page 19 1 for details on how to configure Connection 
Preferences. 

To select a connection: 

1. Tap the Connection pick list. 

The list displays the configurations in your Connection Preferences 

panel. 



Preferences 



*w Service" Untitled 



User No 
Possum 



Wireless Modem 
Direct USB/Serial 
IR to a PC/Handheld 
Standard Modem 



[ Details..?] [ Connect ] 



Tap to display a 
list of 

connection 
configurations 



Select the appropriate Connection. 



Tip: To connect to your packet data network using your phone's built-in 
wireless modem, select High Speed Wireless as the Connection. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



201 



Connecting to your service 

After you set your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a 
connection to your packet data network is easy. 

To establish a connection: 

Tap Connect to sign on to the packet data network defined in the 
current service template. 

Your communication displays Service Connection Progress 
messages. 



Tip: To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages, press the 
bottom scroll button. 



To close a connection: 

Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your phone 
and your packet data network. 

Adding detailed information to a Mobile IP service template 

A Mobile IP service template provides a persistent data connection to your 
packet data network while moving between data service regions within 
your home network. Mobile IP networks require you to supply an HA 
(Home Agent) server address which acts like a forwarding address. The 
HA server translates the IP address on your phone into a "care of" address 
and enables other devices to locate you as you roam through the 
network. 

If you are creating a new Mobile IP service template, you need to provide 
additional information to connect to your packet data network. You use 
the Details and Advanced dialog boxes to add additional information to 
the selected service template. 

To define a Mobile IP service template: 

1. Tap Details. 

2. Make sure the Mobile IP check box is selected. 



202 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 







Mobile IP 

HFl Password 
Primary HH 
Secondary HFl 




\ -Prompt-! 






h 




( OK ] (Cancel ) [ Advanced...) * 



-Select check box 



3. Tap HA Password and enter your Home Agent password. 

4. Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary HA field, 
and then enter the first section of the primary HA address. 



Note: Each section must be a number from 0 to 255. 

5. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the Primary HA field. 

6. Tap and enter all sections of the Secondary HA address. 

Defining an IP address for a Mobile IP service template 

Everyone who logs on to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier 
(an IP address), whether permanent or temporary. Some networks 
dynamically assign a temporary IP address when clients log in. The IP 
Address field lets you identify whether your network provides automatic 
(dynamic) temporary IP addressing. 



Note: Most networks automatically assign IP addresses. Leave the 
Automatic IP Address option checked unless you are certain you need to 
manually enter IP address information. 

To identify dynamic IP addressing: 

1. Tap Advanced. 

2. Tap the IP Address check box to select it. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



203 



IP flddress: ET Auromaric 



Tunneling:"^ Reverse 

MN-Hfl SPI: 

MN-RflR SPI: 



Tap to select 
- automatic IP 
address 



n 

f OK 1 f Cancel ) 



To enter a permanent IP address: 

1. Tap Advanced. 

2. Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent 
IP address field below the check box. 



IP Address: □ fujromaric 
I 



Tunneling: Reverse 

MN-Hfl SPI: 

MUMfflRSPt 



f OK 1 f Cancel ' l 



Tap to deselect 
- automatic IP 
address 



3. Tap the space to the left of the first period, and then enter the first 
section of the IP address. 



Note: Each section must be a number from 0 to 255. 

4. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address. 

5. Hold Option ( and press Return >J to finish. 

Defining Tunneling and SPI in a Mobile IP service template 

Tunneling and SPI (Security Parameter Index) are advanced parameters 
that you can use to configure a Mobile IP service template. Consult your 
System Administrator to obtain the correct settings. 



204 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



To enter Tunneling and SPI: 

1. Tap the Tunneling pick list and select Reverse or Forward. 



IP Address: n fluromaric 



Tunneling: y Rever: 
MN-Hfl SPI: 



f OK I f iljneel ) 



Tap to select 
-tunneling 
direction 



2. Tap the MN-HA-SPI field and enter the Home Agent security 
parameter index. 

3. Tap the MN-AAA-SPI field and enter the AAA security parameter 
index. 

4. Hold Option C and press Return Q to finish. 

Adding detailed information to a Simple IP service template 

A Simple IP service template provides a persistent data connection while 
inside your home service area. A Simple IP configuration does not 
support a persistent data connection as you move between data service 
regions. 

If you are creating a new Simple IP service template, you need to provide 
additional information to connect to your packet data network. You use 
the Details and Advanced dialog boxes to add additional information to 
the selected service template. 

To define a Simple IP service template: 
1. Tap Details. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



205 



Details © 


Deselect check box 




Mobile IP: \h 




B 




f OK ] (Cancel ) [Advanced...) * 





2. Deselect the Mobile IP check box. 



Defining the IP address in a Simple IP service template 

Everyone who logs on to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier 
(an IP address), whether permanent or temporary. Some networks 
dynamically assign a temporary IP address when clients log in. The IP 
Address field lets you identify whether your network provides automatic 
(dynamic) temporary IP addressing. 



Note: Most networks automatically assign IP addresses. Leave the 
Automatic IP Address option checked unless you are certain you need to 
manually enter IP address information. 



To identify dynamic IP addressing: 

1. Tap Advanced. 

2. Tap the IP Address check box to select it. 



IP Address: n Automatic 



Tap to select 
- automatic IP 



n 

f OK 1 (Cancel ) 



206 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



To enter a permanent IP address: 

1. Tap Advanced. 

2. Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and display a permanent 
IP address field below the check box. 



IP Address: n fluromaric 
I 



Tunneling: Reverse 
MN-Hfl SPI: 



Tap to deselect 
- automatic IP 



address 



n 

f OK 1 f iljneel ) 



3. Tap the space to the left of the first period, and then enter the first 
section of the IP address. 



Note: Each section must be a number from 0 to 255. 



4. Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return J to finish. 

Defining DNS addresses in a Simple IP service template 

The Domain Naming System (DNS) is a mechanism in the Internet for 
translating the names of host computers into IP addresses. When you 
enter a DNS number (or IP address), you are identifying a specific server 
that handles the translation services. 

Each IP address has four sections, separated by periods. In the Details 
dialog box, you enter each section separately. Each section of an IP 
address is made up of a number from 0 to 255; numbers are the only 
allowable characters in this field. 

Ask your System Administrator for the correct Primary or Secondary DNS 
IP numbers. 



Note: Most networks automatically provide DNS information. Leave the 
Query DNS option checked unless you are certain you need to manually 
enter DNS information. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



207 



To enter a primary and secondary DNS: 

1 . Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it. 



Rduanced © 




IP Address: □ Automatic 




Query DNS: [J] 


Tap to deselect 


Primary DNS: 


check box 


Secondary DNS: 




h 




f OK ]( Cancel) » 





2. Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field, 
and then enter the first section of the IP address. 



Note: Each section must be a number from 0 to 255. 

3. Repeat step 2 for the second, third, and last sections of the Primary 
DNS field. 

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Secondary DNS number. 

5. Hold Option O and press Return \J to finish. 

Deleting a service template 

There is only one way to delete a service template: use the Delete 
command from the Service menu. 

To delete a service template: 

1 . Tap the Service pick list. 

2. Tap the service template you want to delete. 

Note: You cannot delete the predefined Sprint templates. 

3. Press Menu ffpss*. 

4. Under Service, select Delete (/D). 

5. Hold Option ( and press Return \J to finish. 



208 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Network Preferences menu commands 

The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it 
fast and easy to create and edit service templates. Network Preferences 
menus are show here for your reference. 

See page 28 for more information about choosing menu commands. 
Service menu 

i" ^f*?Pt ^ hdit Options | 
New SN 
Delete... SD 
Duplicate 

Options menu 



[ Service Edit 


Options 






Preferences... 
View Loq 



Troubleshooting network connections 

If you are having a problem establishing a network connection, check 
this section and try the suggestions listed. 

Checking your wireless service status 

Make sure the wireless mode on your phone is active and that you are in 
a coverage area. The LED on the top of your phone and the signal bars at 
the top of the PhoneBook screen provide visual cues about the wireless 
mode status. See page 7 and page 82 for details. 

Displaying expanded Service Connection Progress messages 

It's helpful to identify at what point in the login procedure the 
connection fails. An easy way to do this is to display the expanded Service 
Connection Progress messages. Expanded Service Connection Progress 
messages describe the current stage of the login procedure. Press the 
bottom scroll button at any point during login to display these messages. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



209 



Viewing the Network Log 

If viewing the expanded Service Connection Progress messages does not 
give you enough information to find out why you cannot connect to your 
packet data network, take a look at the Network Log. The Network Log 
lists all of the communication that occurs between your phone and your 
server during the login procedure. The information in the Network Log 
can help your System Administrator pinpoint where the login procedure 
fails and why. 

To view the Network Log: 

1. Press Menu ffaai . 

2. Under Options, select View Log (/V). 

3. Use the scroll buttons to see the entire Network Log. 

4. Hold Option ' and press Return Q to finish. 

Adding a DNS number 

If your packet data server requires a DNS number and you did not enter 
that information in the Network Preferences screen, it will appear that 
you successfully logged into your network. When you try to use an 
application or look up information, however, the connection fails. If this 
occurs, try adding a DNS number. Ask your System Administrator for the 
correct Primary and Secondary DNS IP numbers. 

Owner Preferences 

The Owner Preferences screen enables you to record a name, company 
name, phone number, or any other information that you want to 
associate with your phone. 

If you use the Security application to turn off and lock your phone with a 
password, information that you put in the Owner Preferences displays the 
next time you turn on your phone. 

To enter the Owner Preferences: 

». Enter the text that you want to associate with your phone in the 
Owner Preferences screen. If you enter more text than can fit on one 
screen, a scroll bar automatically appears on the right side of the 
screen. 



210 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Preferences 



M [dyne Spear 
Creative Spear it 
Hum i" [juiiii c h 

«3 :•: 



|f found, pjeqse contact me 



If you assign a password with the Security application, the information 
in the Owner Preferences screen cannot be changed. In this case, an 
Unlock button appears at the bottom of the screen. 

To unlock the Owner Preferences screen: 

1. Tap Unlock. 

2. Enter the password that you defined in the Security application. 

3. Hold Option _ and press Return Q to finish. 

Ringer Preferences 

The Ringer Preferences screen controls the behavior of the ringer on your 
phone. You can control the ring volume, select unique ring tones for 
various types of incoming calls and notifications, and turn the vibrate 
option on and off for each of the two ringer switch positions. 

To select ring volume settings: 

1. Tap the Volume box. 

2. Tap the Ring Volume pick list and select the ring volume level you 
want to use. 



Note: When you change the ring volume, the Known Caller tone plays 
once. To avoid playing the tone, move the ringer switch to the silent 
position before changing the volume. 



3. Tap the Vibrate pick lists to enable or disable the vibrate option for 
the corresponding ringer switch position: Sound Mode l\P and 
Silent Mode %. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



211 



Preferences 


t Ringer 




H Volume Q 


- 1 d Sound frlode On 




Ring Volume: 


t Loud 


Vibrate: 


^ Off 


ffi Sound Made Off 




Vibrate: 


^ On 




[ Tips... ] 



4. Hold Option _ and press Return <J to finish. 

To select ring tone settings: 
1. Tap the Tone box. 



[Preferences H 


t Ringer 


| Volume B 


a 


Known Caller Tone: 


t Treo 


Unknown Caller Tone: 


■w Treo 


Roaming Tone: 


Treo 


Message Tone: 


▼ On 


Voicemail Tone: 


▼ On 


Service Tone: 


T Off 




[ Tips... ] 



2. Tap the various call tone pick lists and select a ringer sound for each 
of the following types of incoming calls: 

Plays this sound when you receive a call that matches any number 
stored in your Speed Dial or Contacts list. This setting is independent 
from the unique ring you can assign to specific numbers in your 
Speed Dial list. 

Plays this sound when you receive a call from a number that does not 
match any of the numbers stored in your Speed Dial or Contacts list. 

Plays this sound when you receive a call while roaming outside a PCS 
coverage area. 

Plays this sound when you have a text message. 
Plays this sound when you have a new voicemail message. 
Plays this sound for PCS related notifications. 



Known 
Caller 

Unknown 
Caller 

Roaming 

Message 
Voicemail 
Service 



212 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



Note: When you select a ringer sound, the sound plays once. To avoid 
playing the sound, move the ringer switch to the silent position before 
selecting a new ringer sound. 

3. Hold Option 0 and press Return to finish. 

Shortcuts Preferences 

The Shortcuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for 
entering text. This section describes how to create, edit, and delete a 
Shortcut. See page 30 for information on the use of Shortcuts. 

Creating a Shortcut 

You can create a Shortcut for any words, letters, or numbers. All 
Shortcuts you create appear on the list in the Shortcut Preferences 
screen. All the Shortcuts are available in any of your phone applications 
and are backed up on your computer when you perform a HotSync 
operation. 

To create a Shortcut: 

1. Tap New. 

2. On the Shortcut Name line, enter the letters you want to use to 
activate the Shortcut. 



Preferences 



di - Dinner 

ds - [Date Stamp] 

dts - [Date and Time Stamp] 

lu - Lunch 

me - Meeting 

ts - [Time Stamp] 



Mew ] [ Edit ] [Delete...] 



_ Tap New 



Shortcut Entry 



Shortcut Name: 



Shortcut Tent: 



[ OK ] [ Cancel j 



3. Tap the Shortcut Text area and enter the text that you want to 
appear when you type the Shortcut characters. 



Hp: You may want to add a space (space character) afterthe last word in 
your Shortcut text. This way, a space automatically follows the Shortcut 
text. 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



213 



4. Hold Option Q and press Return Q to finish. 



Tip: To use a Shortcut, enter the Shortcut symbol followed by the Shortcut 
characters. See page 30 for details. 

Editing a Shortcut 

After you create a Shortcut, you can modify it at any time. 

To edit a Shortcut: 

1 . Tap the Shortcut you want to edit. 

2. Tap Edit. 

3. Make the changes you want. 

4. Hold Option [ and press Return ^ to finish. 

Deleting a Shortcut 

If you no longer need a Shortcut, you can delete it from the list of 
Shortcuts. 

To delete a Shortcut: 

1 . Tap the Shortcut you want to delete. 

2. Tap Delete. 

3. Hold Option Q and press Return \J for Yes. 



214 



Section 7 

Setting Preferences for Your Phone 



8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 

HotSync" Manager enables you to synchronize data between one or 
more Palm OS" devices and Palm™ Desktop software or another 
PIM such as Microsoft Outlook. To synchronize data, you must connect 
your PCS Phone Handspring* Treo™ 300 and your desktop software 
either directly, by connecting your phone to the HotSync cable attached to 
your computer or using infrared communication, or indirectly, using the 
a network. 

This chapter describes how to select HotSync options and perform a 
HotSync operation via the infrared port or a network. See page 76 for 
information about performing your first and subsequent local HotSync 
operations. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



Selecting HotSync setup options 

You can choose when you want HotSync Manager to run. If necessary, 
you can adjust the local and modem HotSync settings as well. 

To set the HotSync options: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon ® ™ in the Windows system tray. 

2. Choose Setup. 



General | Local j Modem | Network | 



HotSync Manager 

] i ilil mi i 1 I I 
'" Available only when -lis Palm Desktop is running 
Manna! (you start the HotSync Manageryonrself) 



Help 



3. Click the General tab and select one of the following options: 



Always 
available 



Available only 
when Palm 
Desktop 
software is 
running 

Manual 



Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and constantly 
monitors the communication port for synchronization requests 
from your phone. With this option, the HotSync Manager 
synchronizes data even when Palm Desktop software is not 
running. 

Starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests automatically 
when you open Palm Desktop software. 



Monitors requests only when you select HotSync Manager from the 
Start menu. 



Tip: If you're not sure which option to use, keep the default setting: Always 
available. 



216 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



4. Click the Loca I tab to display the settings for the connection between 
your computer and the HotSync cable, and adjust the following 
options as needed. 



Setup 




Serial Port Identifies the port that your desktop software uses to communicate with 
the optional serial HotSync cable. This selection should match the 
number of the port to which you connected the optional cable. 



Note: Your phone cannot share this port with an internal 
modem or other device. 



Speed Determines the speed at which data is transferred between your phone 
andyourdesktop software. Try theAsFastAs Possible rate first, andadjust 
downward if you experience problems. This setting allows your desktop 
software and your phone to find and use the fastest speed. 

5. If you are attached to a network, click the Network tab to display the 
network settings and adjust the options as needed. See page 225 for 
more information. 

6. Click OK. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



Customizing HotSync application settings 

For each application, you can define a set of options that determines how 
records are handled during synchronization. These options are called a 
"conduit." By default, a HotSync operation synchronizes all files between 
the phone and your desktop software. 

In general, you should leave the settings to synchronize all files. The only 
reason you might want to change these settings is to overwrite data on 
either your phone or your desktop software, or to avoid synchronizing a 
particular type of file because you don't use it. 

In addition to the conduits for the applications on your phone, HotSync 
Manager includes System and Install conduits. The System conduit 
backs up the system information stored on your phone, including 
keyboard Shortcuts. The Install conduit installs applications on your 
phone. 

To customize HotSync application settings: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon ® in the Windows system tray 
(bottom-right corner of the taskbar). 



Tip: You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop 
software menu bar. 



2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom. 



E 



3 



Conduit 


Action 


Mail 


Synchronize the files 


Date Book 


Synchronize the files 


Address Book 


Synchronize the files 


To Do List 


Synchronize the files 


Memo Pad 


Synchronize the files 


Expense 


Synchronize the files 


Install 


Enabled 


Install Service Templates 


Enabled 


System 


Handheld overwrites Desktop 



change . 
□ elault 
Help 



3. Select the appropriate user name from the list. 

4. Select an application in the Conduit list. 



218 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



5. Click Change. 





lange HotSync 


Action 






l-.rAQ. .r.r- Ai-4inn JnK Ha+a Rr-ir-iL- . 










OK | 






'■* [Synchronize the files; 




Cancel 










Help 




*s 


<" Desktop overwrites handheld 








f Handheld overwrites desktop 


I - Set as default 






r Do nothing 





6. Click the direction in which you want to write data, or click Do 
Nothing to skip data transfer for an application. 



Note: Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next 
HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default 
settings. To use a new setting on an ongoing basis, select the Set As 
Default box. Thereafter, whatever you selected as the default setting is 
used when you click the Default button in the Custom dialog. 



7. Click OK. 

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other 
applications. 

9. Click Done to activate your settings. 

IR HotSync operations 

Your phone is equipped with an infrared (IR) port that supports the 
IrCOMM implementation of the standards for infrared communication 
established by the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) . This means that you 
can beam data to any other device that supports the IrCOMM 
implementation of the IrDA standards. Most importantly, you can use the 
IR port to perform HotSync operations. When you use the IR port on your 
phone to perform HotSync operations, you don't need your HotSync 
cable. You simply enable infrared communication on your computer and 
your phone and then perform an IR HotSync operation. So there's no 
need to carry your cable when you're on the road with an infrared- 
enabled laptop. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



219 



Preparing your computer for infrared communication 

To perform an IR HotSync operation, the computer you want to 
synchronize with must have an enabled infrared port or be connected to 
an infrared device that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA 
standards. 

Desktop computers are likely to require an infrared device attached to a 
physical COM port. Laptops are likely to have a built-in IR port. Your 
computer must also have an installed infrared driver. 

Does your computer support infrared communication? 

If your computer uses Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows 
2000, infrared communication is built into the operating system. Some 
versions of Windows 95 also have built-in infrared communication. If 
you are using another type of computer, check the documentation that 
came with your computer to see if it supports infrared communication. 

To check the ports used for infrared communication with 
Windows 98 and Me: 

1 . In the Windows taskbar click Start, choose Settings, and then 
choose Control Panel. 

2. Double-click the Infrared icon. 



Note: If you do not see the Infrared icon, you need to install an infrared 
driver. 

3. Click the Options tab. 

4. Select Enable infrared communication. 



220 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



it Infrared Monitor HE3 



Status | ; Options j| Preferences ] Identi fication^ 

Enable infrared communication. 
Providing application support on COMA and LPT 4 — 

1^ Search for and provide status icr device;; within range. 
Search every |3 seconds. 

T Limit correction speed to: | __; 
rV Install software for Plug and Play devices within range. 



Re store Defaults 




The COM port displayed on this screen is the port associated with your 
infrared device. It should be different from the port currently defined for 
cable synchronization. 

5. Write down the port listed as "Providing application support" so you can 
configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication. 

This port is the simulated port. It is the channel through which the 
actual infrared communication takes place between your computer and 
your phone. 

6. Deselect all other check boxes in the Options tab. 

7. Click Apply and then click OK. 

To enable infrared communication with Windows 2000: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon © in the Windows system tray 
(bottom-right corner of the taskbar). 

2. Choose Exit to close HotSync Manager. 

3. In the Windows taskbar click Start, choose Settings, and then choose 
Control Panel. 

4. Double-click the Wireless Link icon. 

5. Click the Image Transfer tab and deselect the Use Wireless Link to 
transfer images from a digital camera to your computer check box. 



Infrared 
ports 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



221 



Wireless Link 



rr 



File Transfer Image Transter | Hardware | 



! r i i r 5 r -t) gi 

^ '/Ql ™£P*rL 



-Received images 

Trans'Si im^es to ? subfolder ol: 


C:\Documents and Settings 


| 


Explore localion after receiving pictures 





! DK | Cancel | 

6. Click OK. 

7. Disable any other application that opens the IR port. 

Configuring HotSync Manager for infrared communication 

Next you need to go to the HotSync Manager and configure it for infrared 
communication. In Windows 98 and Me, you need to specify the 
simulated port used for infrared communication. In Windows 2000, you 
simply need to activate the infrared menu item. 

To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication with 
Windows 98 and Me: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon © in the Windows system tray. 

2. Make sure Local Serial is checked on the menu. 

3. Choose Setup. 

4. Click the Local tab. 

5. In the Serial Port list, select the simulated port used for infrared 
communication. See the previous section for instructions on 
identifying the simulated port. 



222 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 




6. Click OK. 

The HotSync Manager is now communicating with the simulated port 
defined for infrared communication. 

Note: You cannot use your cable again until you reconfigure the HotSync 
Managerto communicate with the port defined for cable synchronization. 



To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication with 
Windows 2000: 

1 . If necessary, start HotSync Manager. 

2. Click the HotSync Manager icon ® in the Windows system tray. 

V Local U5B 
Local Serial 
Modem 
Network 



Custom... 
File Link. . 
Viev., Leg.. 

About,, . 
Help.. 



3. Choose InfraRed from the HotSync Manager menu. 
Performing an IR HotSync operation 

After you complete the steps to prepare for an IR HotSync operation it is 
easy to perform the actual operation. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



223 



To perform an IR HotSync operation: 

1. Press Option O and then press Menu csm to access the 
Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the HotSync icon 

3. Tap Local. 

4. Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC/ 
Handheld. 



HotSync fl 




Arthur Manzi 


Lost HotSync 5/10/00, 9:56 pm 


using Direct USB/Serial 


IE 


I Modem | 




® 




t IR to a PC/Handheld 


[ Log H Help ] 





5. Position your phone's IR port within a couple of inches of your 
computer's infrared port. 

6. Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation. 

Returning to serial cable HotSync operations 

It's easy to return to using the cable for HotSync operations. 

Note: If you're using a USB cable and the Local USB option is already 
selected on the HotSync Manager menu, you don't need to do anything to 
return to cable operations. 

To return to serial cable HotSync operations with 
Windows 98 and Me: 

1 . If needed, connect the cable to your computer. 

2. Click the HotSync Manager icon ® in the Windows system tray. 

3. Choose Setup, and then click Local. 

4. In the Serial Port list, select the COM port where your cable is 
connected. 

5. Click OK. 



224 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



To disable infrared communication with Windows 2000: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon ® in the Windows system tray. 

2. Uncheck InfraRed on the menu. 

3. In the Windows taskbar click Start, choose Settings, and then 
choose Control Panel. 

4. Double-click the Wireless Link icon. 

5. Click the Image transfer tab, and select the Use Wireless Link to 
transfer images from a digital camera to your computer check 
box. 

The next time you want to perform a HotSync operation just press the 
HotSync button on the cable. You can leave the HotSync application on 
your phone set to perform IR HotSync operations and still use the cable. 
This is useful if you perform HotSync operations with both your desktop 
computer and a laptop. When you are in the office just connect your 
phone to the cable and press the HotSync button. When you travel, you 
don't have to carry a cable. 

Conducting a HotSync operation via a network 

When you use the Network HotSync software, you can take advantage of 
the Local Area Network (LAN) connectivity available in many office 
environments. The Network HotSync software enables you to perform a 
HotSync operation by using a cable that is connected to any computer on 
your LAN (provided that the computer connected to the cable also has the 
Network HotSync software installed, your computer is on, and the 
HotSync Manager is running). 

To prepare your computer for a network HotSync operation: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon © in the Windows system tray 
(bottom-right corner of the taskbar). 

2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Network. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



i Local USB 
^ Local Serial 

Modem 
* Network 

Setup.. 



Custom. 




Note: To perform a Network HotSync from another computer on your 
network, you must select Network from the HotSync Manager menu on 
both your primary computer and the computer you want to use. 

3. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Setup. 

4. Click the Network tab and make sure your user name has a check 
mark next to it. If the check mark is not there, click the check box 
next to your user name. 




5. Click OK. 

6. Connect your phone to the cable and press the HotSync button. 
The HotSync operation records network information about your 
computer on your phone. With this information, your phone can 
locate your computer when you perform a HotSync operation over 
the network. 



226 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



Performing a network HotSync operation via a LAN 

You are ready to perform a network HotSync from another computer on 
your network after you select Network from the HotSync Manager menu 
on both your primary computer and the computer you want to use for 
the network HotSync operation. 

To perform a network HotSync operation via a LAN: 

1 . Connect your phone to a HotSync cable that is connected to a 
computer on the LAN. 

2. Press the HotSync button on the cable. 

HotSync Manager finds your primary computer on the LAN and 
synchronizes with the data on your primary computer. 

Using File Link 

The File Link feature enables you to import PhoneBook and Memo Pad 
information onto your phone from a separate external file such as a 
company phone list. HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate 
category on your Palm Desktop software and your phone. You can 
configure the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file 
when you perform a HotSync operation. 

With File Link, you can import data stored in any of the following 
formats: 

Comma delimited (.csv) 
». Tab delimited (.tsv) 
». Memo Pad archive (.mpa) 
». Address archive (.aba) 
► Text (.txt) 

For information on how to set up a file link, see the Palm Desktop online 
Help. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



Creating a user profile 

If you need to configure several Palm OS® phones with specific 
information (such as a company phone list) before distributing them to 
their actual users, you can create a user profile to load the data into a 
phone without associating that data with a user name. The User Profile 
feature is designed only for the first-time HotSync operation, before you 
assign a User ID to a particular phone. 

To create a user profile: 

1 . Open Palm Desktop software. 

2. From the Tools menu, choose Users. 

3. Click Profiles. 

4. Click New. 



Profiles 






Select a profile: 






OK j 


New.. 


Delete... 






Rename.. 






| Users.. ;| 






Help | 









5. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK. 




6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each profile that you want to create, and 
then click OK to return to Palm Desktop software. 

7. Select the profile from the User list and create the data for the profile 
(e.g., company phone list, etc.). 



228 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 





Tf. 1 .-' |.'|. . i i| 'ii.ii ~i 


Adam ; 

first time 

Midyne 




Edit Users... 



To use a profile for the first-time HotSync operation: 

1 . Connect the new phone to the HotSync cable. 

2. Press the HotSync button on the cable. 

3. Click Profiles. 

4. Select the profile that you want to load on the phone, and click OK. 



Dialog 




5. Click Yes to transfer all the profile data to the phone. 

The next time you perform a HotSync operation, Palm Desktop software 
prompts you to assign a user name to the phone. 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



229 



230 



Section 8 

Advanced HotSync® Operations 



Maintaining Your Phone 

This chapter provides information on the following: 
►Proper care of your PCS Phone Handspring* Treo™ 300 

► Maximizing batteiy life 

► Resetting your phone 



Section 9 
Maintaining Your Phone 



Caring for your phone 

Your phone is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide years of 
trouble-free service. Please observe the following general tips when using 
your phone: 

». Take care not to scratch the screen of your phone. Keep the screen 
clean. When working with your phone, use the supplied stylus or 
plastic-tipped pens intended for use with a touch-sensitive screen. 
Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the 
surface of the phone screen. 

». Your phone is not waterproof and should not be exposed to rain or 
moisture. Under extreme conditions, water may enter the circuitry 
through the front panel buttons. In general, treat your phone as you 
would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument. 

». The touch-sensitive screen of your phone contains a glass element. 
Take care not to drop your phone or subject it to any strong impact. 
Do not carry your phone in your back pocket: if you sit on it, the 
glass may break. 

k Protect your phone from temperature extremes. Do not leave your 

phone on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from 

heaters and other heat sources. 
». Do not store or use your phone in any location that is extremely 

dusty, damp, or wet. 
». Use a soft, damp cloth to clean your phone. If the surface of the 

phone screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened 

with a diluted window-cleaning solution. 

Battery considerations 

Please note the following considerations when using the rechargeable 
battery in your phone: 

». When wireless mode is on, your phone battery should provide 1 50 
hours of stand-by time, or 2.5 hours of talk time between charges. 
When you use your phone in handheld mode and wireless mode is 
off, your phone battery provides approximately one week of use 
between charges. 



232 



Section 9 

Maintaining Your Phone 



». You can conserve battery life by minimizing use of the keyboard 
backlight feature and by choosing a lower Auto-off setting which 
automatically turns the phone off after a period of inactivity. See 
page 196 and page 10 for more information. 

». If the battery becomes low in the course of normal use, an alert 
appears on the phone screen describing the low battery condition. If 
this alert appears, connect your phone to the HotSync cable or travel 
charger to charge the battery. 

». If the battery drains to the point where your phone does not turn on, 
it stores your data safely for about three days. In this case, there is 
enough residual energy in the battery to store the data, but not 
enough to turn on your phone. If your phone does not turn on when 
you press the power button, you should charge the battery 
immediately. 

». If you leave a drained battery in your phone for an extended period 
of time, you can lose all of the stored data. If this happens, charge 
the battery and use the reset button to reset your phone as described 
in the next section. After you reset your phone, perform a HotSync 
operation to restore the data from your computer. 

Resetting your phone 

Under normal circumstances, you will not have to use the reset button. 
On rare occasions, however, your phone may no longer respond to 
buttons or the screen. In this case, you need to perform a reset to get your 
phone running again. 

Performing a soft reset 

A soft reset tells your phone to stop what it's doing and start over again. 
All records and entries stored in your phone are retained with a soft reset. 
After a soft reset, the Welcome screen appears, followed by the General 
Preferences screen (to set time and date). 



Section 9 
Maintaining Your Phone 



To perform a soft reset: 

1 . Unscrew the tip of the stylus to access the reset tool. 




Reset tool 



2. Use the reset tool to gently press the reset button inside the hole on 
the back panel of your phone. 



Tip: You can also use the tip of an unfolded paper clip (or similar object 
without a sharp tip). 




Performing a warm (or safe) reset 

A warm (or safe) reset bypasses system extensions on your phone, such as 
HackMaster hacks or system patches. Performing a warm reset enables 
you to uninstall a third-party application that may be causing a 
problem. 

To perform a warm (or safe) reset: 

1 . Press and hold the top scroll button on the front panel of your phone. 

2. While holding down the top scroll button, use the reset tool (or 
similar object without a sharp tip) to gently press the reset button. 

3. When the system screen appears, release the top scroll button. 



234 



Section 9 

Maintaining Your Phone 



Performing a hard reset 

With a hard reset, all records and entries stored in your phone are erased. 
Never perform a hard reset unless a soft or wann reset does not solve your 
problem. 



Note: You can restore any data previously synchronized with your 
computer during the next HotSync operation. 

To perform a hard reset: 

1 . Press and hold the power button on the top of the phone. 

2. While holding down the power button, use the reset tool (or similar 
object without a sharp tip) to gently press and release the reset 
button. 

3. When the system screen appears, release the power button. 

4. When a message appears on the phone screen warning that you are 
about to erase all the data stored on your phone, do one of the 
following: 

Press the top scroll button on the front panel of your phone to 
complete the hard reset and display the Digitizer screen. 
Press any other button to perform a soft reset. 

Note: With a hard reset, the current date and time are retained. Formats 
Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default 
settings. 

5. If the language selection screen appears, select the same language 
you selected for your desktop software. Choosing a different language 
may result in loss of data. 



Section 9 
Maintaining Your Phone 



To restore your data after a hard reset: 

1 . Click the HotSync Manager icon 0™ in the Windows system tray 
(bottom-right corner of the taskbar). 



Tip: You can also clickthe HotSync command on the Palm Desktop 
software menu bar. 



2. From the HotSync Manager menu, choose Custom. 





Date Book 


Synchroniz 


e the files 


Address Book 


Synchroniz 


e the tiles 


To Do List 


Synchroni: 


e the tiles 


Memo PqcI 


Synchroniz 


e the tiles 


Expense 


Synchroniz 


e the tiles 


Install 


Enabled 




Install Service Templates 


Enabled 




System 


Handheld overwrites Desktop 



Charge... 



Help 



3. Select the appropriate user name from the list. 

4. Select an application in the Conduit list. 

5. Click Change. 




6. Select Desktop overwrites handheld. 



236 



Section 9 

Maintaining Your Phone 



Note: Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next 
HotSync operation. Thereafter, the HotSync Actions revert to their default 
settings. 

7. Click OK. 

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to change conduit settings for other 
applications. 

9. Click Done to activate your settings. 

10. Perform a HotSync operation. 



Section 9 
Maintaining Your Phone 



237 



238 



Section 9 

Maintaining Your Phone 



10 

Troubleshooting Tips 

T f you encounter a problem with your PCS Phone Handspring ■ 
1 Treo™ 300: 

». Review this section to see if your problem is listed 
► Check our web site at www.sprintpcs.com for the latest technical 
support information 

Note: Thousands of third-party add-on applications have been written for 
Palm OS® devices. Unfortunately, we are not able to support such a large 
number of third-party applications. If you are having a problem with a 
third-party application, please contact the developer or publisher of that 
software. 



Section 10 
Troubleshooting Tips 



239 



Software installation problems 



Problem 

Palm™ Desktop software 
will not install successfully. 



Solution 

Disable any anti-virus software, close any open 
applications or utilities, and then perform the installation 
again. 

If you are installing on a computer at your workplace, 
make sure your System Administrator grants you the rights 
to install software. 

If you are still having problems installing the Handspring 
software, try these steps: 

1 . Download the latest version of the software from 
the Customer Support or Product Support 
section ofwww.sprintpcs.com. 

2. Restart your computer in "safe mode." In most 
versions of Windows you can do this by pressing 
F8 on the keyboard as the computer boots. 

3. Install the file you downloaded in step 1. If the 
installation finishes, restart your computer in 
the normal operating mode and start using 
Palm Desktop software. 



240 



Section 10 

Troubleshooting Tips 



Operating problems 



Problem 

My phone won't turn on. 



My phone keeps turning 
itself off. 



Myphoneisnotmakingany 
sounds. 



My phone has frozen. 



I don't see anything on my 
phone's screen. 



Solution 

Try each of these in turn: 

Adjust the display settings. 

Make sure the battery is fully charged. 

Perform a soft reset. See page 233 for details. 

If your phone still does not operate, try a hard 

reset. See page 235 for details. 
Your phone is designed to turn itself off after a period of 
inactivity. This period can be set at one, two, or three 
minutes. Check the Auto-off setting. See page 196 for 
details. 

Check the ringer switch setting on top of your 
phone. The ^ setting turns off all sounds on 
your phone. 

Check the System Sound setting. See page 196 
for details. 

This is most commonly attributed to conflicts with third- 
party software. Try each of these in turn: 

Perform a soft reset. See page 233 for details. 
Delete any application you recently installed. See 
page 42 for details. 

Perform a warm reset. See page 234 for details. 
Perform a hard reset. See page 235 for details. 

Adjust the display settings. 
Charge the battery. 
Perform a soft reset. 



► 
► 

► 
► 

► 
► 
► 



Tapping and keyboard problems 

Problem Solution 

When I tap the buttons or Calibrate the screen. See page 194 for details, 
screen icons, it activates the 
wrong feature. 

When Ipress Menu gjgsa , Not all applications or screens have menus. Try changing 

nothing happens. to a different application. 



Section 10 
Troubleshooting Tips 



241 



Wireless communication problems 



Problem 

I can't use the wireless 
features 



MyPCSTreo 300 requires an 
unlocking code, but I didn ' t 
set one 



I called Sprint to activate my 
service, but wireless mode 
still doesn't work 
My phone number isn't on 
the Phone Info screen 



MyPCSTreo 300 won't 
register to the network 



The voicemail icon appears 
when I don't have any new 
voice messages. 



Solution 

Make sure your PCS Treo 300 battery is charged. 
». Make sure wireless mode is on. To turn on wireless 
mode, press and hold the power button for at least 
two seconds, until you hear a confirmation tone. 
An ascending tone means wireless mode is now on, 
a descending tone means wireless mode is now off. 

Sprint may have set the locking code before you 
received your PCS Treo 300. Enter the default 
unlocking code and then tap OK. In North 
America, the default unlocking code is usually the 
last four digits of your phone number. If this 
doesn't work, contact Sprint. 

Sometimes it requires 24 hours ormore to activate yourwireless 
service. If it has been longer than the standard activation 
period, report the problem to your Sprint representative. 
Sprint may need to install your phone number onto your 
phone. Contactyour Sprint representative to see if they can send 
a message to your PCS Treo 300 that writes your phone number 
onto your phone. 

». You are probably outside a PCS network coverage 
area. Try enabling roaming as described on page 
109 or try another Sprint phone to verify whether 
coverage is available in your current location. 
Turn off the wireless mode on your phone, and 
then turn it on again. If a dialog appears asking if 
you want to search for a network, tap Yes. 

». Check your messages to confirm that you've 

listened to all your new messages. 

Turn wireless mode off and then turn it on again. 
». If the icon still appeal's, follow these steps: 

1 . From the Speed Dial, Dial Pad, or Call Histoiy view, 
press Menu ^XD- 

2. Under Options, select Call Preferences (/A). 

3. Tap Clear Voicemail Icon. 

4. Hold Option (_ and press Return w' to finish. 



242 



Section 10 

Troubleshooting Tips 



I tried dialing a phone 
number, but my PCS Treo 
300 just beeps at me 



I can't dial international 
numbers 

Caller ID blocking for my 
outgoing calls doesn't work 



Some incoming caller's 
names don't appear in Call 
History 



I frequently miss incoming 
voice calls when I'm 
browsing the web. 

How do I know when I'm 
sending and receiving data? 



». Make sure you dialed the correct number. 

». Wait a few minutes and try again. If the network is 
very busy, calls cannot connect. 
Verify that you are in a network coverage area and 
then move a few yards away and try the call again. 
If you are in a weak coverage area (1 bar of signal 
strength or less) , you may not be able to complete 
calls even though you are registered to the network. 

For security purposes, some service plans require you to enable 
international calling on your account. Call your Sprint 
representative for details. 

». Some service plans require you to enable this 
feature on your account. Call your Sprint 
representative to enable blocking your Caller ID. 

». Make sure you enter *67 before dialing the 
number. 

If a caller has blocked or restricted their Caller ID, 
the text "Blocked Caller ID" or "Restricted Caller 
ID" appears instead of the name and number. 
If a caller ID information is not available, the text 
"No caller ID" appears instead of the name and 
number. 

Call History does not show names for records you 
marked hidden in your Contacts list. 

Wheneveryou send and receive data with any wireless Palm OS 
application, incoming voice calls are automatically sent to 
voicemail. You cannot send and receive data and receive voice 
calls at the same time. 

When you' re connected to the PCS Vision network, gray arrows 
appear over thesignalstrengthbats. The gray arrows turn green 
when you browse the web, download e-mail, or use other 
applications that send or receive data across the PCS Vision 
network. You are billed by the number of data packets that you 
send and receive. When the arrows are green, your calls are 
forwarded to voicemail. When the arrows are gray, the PCS 
Vision network services are available to you, but you are not 
sending and receiving data so you can receive calls. 



Section 10 
Troubleshooting Tips 



243 



The Blazer* application 
won't connect to the 
Internet 



I get an error when making 
data calls 

Why do I sometimes get 
disconnected from the PCS 
Vision network? 



I get an error when 
connecting to the PCS 
Vision network. 



Ican'tdialintomyRAS.ISP, 
or corporate dial-up 
account. 



Confinn that your service plan includes PCS Vision 
and not just voice minutes. 
Confinn that your Network Preferences settings are 
properly configured. 

1. Press Option i and then press Menu ^25) 1° 
access the Applications Launcher. 

2. Tap the Preferences icon 

3. Select Network from the pick list in the upper-right 
corner. 

4. Make sure that you selected a Sprint profile. 

5. Tap Connect. If the Connect button changes to a 
Disconnect button after the connection dialogs 
finish, your Network Preferences settings are 
working. If the Connect button does not change, 
make sure that you are in a coverage area and that 
wireless mode is on. 

6. Contact Sprint Customer Care if you continue to 
have trouble. 

Check with Sprint to make sure that PCS Vision 
services are enabled on your account. 
Verify that you are in a coverage area. 

The PCS Vision network automatically logs you off 
when you don't send or receive data for a couple 
hours. 

During peak usage periods, you may experience 
drops in the network connection. 

Make sure you are using the correct password. If you enter the 
wrong password six times or more while attempting to connect 
to the PCS Vision network, the networklocksyou outfor aperiod 
of 24 hours. To correct this problem, contact Sprint to obtain the 
correct password and reenter the password in the Sprint service 
profile on the Network Preferences screen. See page 197 for 
instructions. 

Your phone is pre configured for a persistent connection to the 
PCS Vision network. Dial-up connections are not currently 
available. 



244 



Section 10 

Troubleshooting Tips 



Application problems 



Problem 

I tapped the Today button, 
but it does not show the 
correct date. 
I know I entered some 
records, but they do not 
appear in the application. 



I am having problems 
listing memos the way I 
want to see them. 



I created an event in Date 
Book Plus, but it doesn't 
appear in the Week View. 



Solution 

Your phone is not set to the current date. Make sure the Set 
Date box in the General Preferences screen displays the 
current date. See page 17 and page 196 for details. 

». Check the Categories pick list (upper-right 
corner of the screen) . Choose Al I to display all 
of the records for the application. 
Check Security and make sure that the Private 
Records setting is set to Show private records. 
In To Do List, tap Show and check whether 
Show Only Due Items is selected. 

If you cannot manually arrange the order of 
the memos in the list screen, check the Memo 
Preferences setting. Make sure that Sort by is 
set to Manual. 

If you choose to view your memos 
alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and 
then perform a HotSync® operation, the 
memos on your phone still appear in the order 
defined in the Memo Preferences setting. In 
other words, the sort settings that you use with 
Palm Desktop software are not transferred to 
your phone. 

In the Week View, you cannot select overlappingevents that 
have the same start time. If you have two or more events 
with the same start time, choose the Day View for the 
particular day to see the overlapping events. 



Section 10 
Troubleshooting Tips 



245 



HotSync problems 

Problem Solution 

Why can't I Try each of these in turn. After each step, try to synchronize to see if the 

synchronize my phone problem persists: 

with my computer? ». Make sure you installed the software that came with your 
phone. You must install this software even if you upgraded 
from another Palm OS handheld. 
Make sure there are no active calls on your PCS Treo 300 
before you begin a HotSync operation. You cannot 
synchronize while you have an active call, and you cannot 
make or receive calls during a HotSync operation. 

». Make sure you selected your user name in Palm Desktop 
software before beginning the HotSync operation. 
Perform a soft reset. See page 233 for details. 

». Make sure the HotSync Manager icon @ ' appears in the 
Windows system tray in the lower-right corner of the screen. 
If it does not appear, open the Start menu, select Programs, 
Handspring, and then HotSync Manager. 

». Click the HotSync Manager icon and make sure that the 
Local USB option has a check next to it. If you are using an 
optional serial cable, make sure that the Local Serial has a 
check next to it, then select Setup and confirm that the COM 
port setting matches the port where you attached the serial 
cable. 

Make sure the cable is connected securely to your computer 
and your phone. 

Make sure you are using the correct type of cable. If your 
computer does not have a USB port, or is running Windows 
95 or Windows NT 4.0, you must use a serial cable. 
If you're using a USB cable, insert the Handspring CD into 
your computer, use Windows Explorer or My Computer to 
navigate to the Utilities folder, and then run the Visor USB 
registry utility. 

If you are using a USB cable, disconnect any other USB 
devices you are using. If you're connecting your cable to a 
USB hub, disconnect it and connect your cable directly to 
your computer. 

If you are using a serial cable, try a lower baud rate setting 
on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box. 
». Restart your computer. 

If you installed a conduit from a third-party software 
developer, contact the developer for support. 



246 



Section 10 

Troubleshooting Tips 



I did a HotSync 
operation, but one of 
my applications did 
not synchronize. 
I cannot launch the 
HotSync Manager. 



I am using Outlook as 
my PIM, but I cannot 
do a HotSync 
operation. 



Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom . Make sure that the 
conduit appears on the list and that it is set to Synchronize the files. See 
page 218 for details. 

Make sure you are not running another program, such as 
America Online, CompuServe, or WinFax, that uses the 
port you selected in the Setup dialog box. 
». Reinstall the Palm Desktop software. 

». Click the HotSync Manager and choose Custom . Make 
sure that the following Outlook conduits are installed and 
that the Action is set to "Synchronize the files" for each 
conduit: Outlook Contacts, Outlook Calendar, Outlook 
Tasks, and Outlook Notes. 

> Reinstall the Palm Desktop software and make sure you 
select the option to synchronize with MS Outlook. 



Beaming problems 

Problem 

I cannot beam data to 
another IR-equipped Palm 
OS device. 



When someone beams data 
to myphone, I get a message 
telling me it is out of 
memory. 



Solution 

Confirm that your phone and the other device are 
between ten centimeters (approximately 4") and 
one meter (approximately 39") apart, and that the 
path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. 
Beaming distance to other Palm OS devices may be 
different. 

Check the General Preferences screen and make 

sure the Beam Receive setting is on. 

Move your phone closer to the receiving device. 

Move your phone farflier away from the receiving 

device. 

Angle the sides of the two devices towards each 
other. 

Perfonn a soft reset. See page 233 for details. 

». Your phone requires at least twice the amount of 
memory available as the data you are receiving. For 
example, if you are receiving a 30K application, 
you must have at least 60K free. 
Perform a soft reset. See page 233 for details. 



Section 1 0 
Troubleshooting Tips 



247 



Password problems 



Problem Solution 

I forgot the password to You can use Security to delete the password. If you do this, 
show my hidden or masked your phone deletes all entries marked as private. You can, 



records. 



I forgot the password and 
my phone is locked. 



however, perform aHotSync operation before you delete the 
password: the HotSync process backs up all entries, whether 
or not they are marked private. In this case, the following 
procedure restores your private entries and lets you access 
them: 

1 . Use the Palm Desktop software and the cable to 
synchronize your data. 

2. Tap Forgotten Password in Security to 
remove the password and delete all private 
records. 

3. Perform a HotSync operation to synchronize 
your data and restore the private records by 
transferring them from your computer to your 
phone. 

». The default password for your phone is the last 
four-digits of your phone number. 
If Wireless Mode Lock is on, you can use the 
handheld mode features of your phone, but 
you must contact Sprint to unlock wireless 
mode. 

> If Communicator Lock is on, you must 

perform a hard reset (see page 235 for details) 
to access the handheld mode features of your 
phone, and you must contact Sprint to unlock 
wireless mode. 



248 



Section 10 

Troubleshooting Tips 



Technical support 

If you cannot solve your problem after reviewing the sources listed at the 
beginning of this appendix, check our web site www.sprintpcs.com for the 
latest technical support information, or call *2 if you have questions. 

Before requesting support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and 
isolate the problem. When you do contact support, please be ready to 
provide the following information: 

». The name and version of the operating system you are using 
»- The actual error message or state you are experiencing 
► The steps you take to reproduce the problem 



Section 10 
Troubleshooting Tips 



249 



250 



Section 10 

Troubleshooting Tips 



Other Product Information 



Performance and Safety 

Important Information About Your Phone and Service 
Keeping Tabs on Signal Strength 

The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the signal strength in your area. Your 
phone informs you of the current signal strength by displaying a number of bars next to the 
signal strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the signal. If you're inside a building, 
being near a window may give you better reception. 

Understanding the Power Save Feature 

If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature is 
automatically activated and "No Service" appears in the Status Bar of the PhoneBook 
application. If your phone is active, it periodically rechecks service availability. When a signal is 
found, your phone returns to Standby mode and the time appears in place of "No Service" in the 
Status Bar of the PhoneBook application. 

Understanding How Your Phone Operates 

Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it's turned on, it receives and 
transmits radio frequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your call 
controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode. 

Knowing Radio Frequency Safety 

The design of your phone complies with updated NCRP standards described below. To further 
limit RF exposure, you can limit the duration of your calls and operate your phone in die most 
power-efficient manner. In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 
and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI's 1982 standard 
for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers 
and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industries developed this 
updated standard after reviewing the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal 
Communications Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 
1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the 
guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protections and Measurements 
(NCRP). 

Maintaining Your Phone's Peak Performance 

There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone properly and maintaining safe, 
satisfactory service. 

^ Try not to hold the phone's antenna and don't twist the antenna; this will damage the 
antenna. 

»- Don't use the phone if the antenna is damaged. 
Speak directly into the mouthpiece. 

Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your phone does get 
wet, immediately turn the power off. If it's inoperable, return it to a Sprint Store or call PCS 
Customer Service Solutions for service. 



Note: Forthe best care of your phone, only Sprint Authorized Personnel should sen/ice your 
phone and accessories. Faulty service may void the warranty. 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone 

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL 
INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY DAMAGE 

Using Your Phone While Driving 

Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free device) is 
prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety 
always comes first. 

When using your phone in the car: 

^ Get to know your phone and its features, such as speed dial and redial. 
^ When available, use a hands-free device. 
^ Position your phone within easy reach. 

^ Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in 
heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. 
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. 

Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when stationary or before pulling 
into traffic. 

^ Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations thai may divert your attention from 
the road. 

^. Dial 91 1 to report serious emergencies. It's free from your wireless phone. 
^ Use your phone to help other's in emergencies. 

». Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when necessary. 
Following Safety Guidelines 

To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations in a given 
area. Turn your phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or 
danger. 

Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices 

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, RF 
signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic equipment. 

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating systems 
and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their 
representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF signals. Also 
check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. 

Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids, 
to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals. 



Note: Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission before 
using the phone near medical equipment. 



Turning Off Wireless Mode Before Flying 

Turn off wireless mode before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference with aircraft 
systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have 
permission from a crew member to use wireless mode while the plane is on the ground. To 
prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit using wireless mode while the plane is 
in the air. 



252 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



Turning Off Wireless Mode in Dangerous Areas 

To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn off wireless mode when in a blasting area or 
in other areas with signs indicating two-way radios should be turned off. Construction crews often 
use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives. 

Turn off wireless mode when you're in any area that has a potentially explosive atmosphere. 
Although it's rare, your phone and accessories could generate sparks. Sparks can cause an 
explosion or fire, resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are often, but not always, 
clearly marked. They include: 

». Fueling areas such as gas stations. 

^ Below deck on boats. 

^ Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities. 

^ Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. 

». Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle's engine. 



Note: Never transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the compartment of 
your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories. 



Restricting Children's Access to Your Phone 

Your phone is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and 
others, damage the phone or make calls that increase your phone bill. 

Caring for and Protecting Your Phone Battery 

The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your batteiy's performance. 

^ Use only Sprint-approved chargers. These chargers are designed to maximize battery life. 

Using other chargers voids your warranty and may cause damage. 
^ In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32° F to 

113° F 

(0°Cto45° C). 

». Don't use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such as the 
bathroom. 

^ Keep the metal contacts on the bottom of the phone clean. 

^ The batteiy may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time. 

^ Don't store the batteiy in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It's best to follow 

these storage rules: 

32° F to 122° F (0° C to 50" 0 

Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice 
FCC Notice 

This phone may cause TV or radio interference if used in close proximity to receiving equipment. 
The FCC can require you to stop using the phone if such interference cannot be eliminated. 
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire 
Protection Standard (NFPA-58) . For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protections 
Association, One Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, Attn: Publication Sales Division. 

Cautions 

Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly approved in this document could void 
your warranty for this equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use 
approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex 
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it. 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



253 



Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy (SAR) 

In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety' guidelines, users MUST use a Sprint-approved 
body-worn accessory during body-worn operation. Use of accessories not approved by Sprint or 
that have not been tested for RF exposure compliance with this product may not comply with the 
FCC RF exposure safety guidelines and should not be used. 

See httpy/www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety for more information on RF exposure safety. 

User Guide Proprietary Notice 

CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following 
patents: 

4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797 
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501 
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239 
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338 
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569 
5,490,165 5,511,073 

T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. 
Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending. 

Handspring Product Warranty 

Warranty. Handspring warrants to you that at the date of purchase, the product is free of defects 
in workmanship and materials, and the software included in the product will perform in 
substantial compliance to its program specifications. 

Exclusions from Warranty. This warranty does not cover physical damage to the surface of the 
product, including, without limitation, breakage, cracks, dents, scratches or adhesive marks on 
the LCD touchscreen or outside casing of the product caused by you or a third party. In addition, 
this warranty shall not apply (i) if the casing for the product is opened by someone other than an 
authorized Handspring representative; (ii) if the defect or malfunction is caused by your or a third 
party's misuse, accident, modification of the product's components, or operation of the product 
in an unsuitable environment or in a manner for which it is not intended; (iii) if Handspring's 
testing and examination discloses that the alleged defect or malfunction in the product does not 
exist, (iv) if the defect or malfunction results from the use of the product in conjunction with 
accessories, other products, or ancillary or peripheral equipment and Handspring determines that 
there is no fault with the product itself; or (v) if the defect or malfunction is due to any 
communication service you may subscribe to or use with the product. Handspring shall not be 
responsible for software, firmware, information, or memory data contained in, stored on, or 
integrated with any products returned to Handspring for repair, whether under warranty or not. 
Handspring makes no warranty or representation that its software products will meet your 
requirements or will work in combination with any hardware or applications software products 
provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error 
free, or tliat all defects in the software products will be corrected. 

Remedies. Handspring shall, at its discretion, either replace the product with a comparable 
product, repair the product, or refund the purchase price paid for the product. Replacement 
products may be new or reconditioned. 

Warranty Period. The warranty period is one (1) year from your date of purchase. Handspring 
warrants any replaced or repaired product for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of 
shipment back to you, or through the end of the original warrant)' period, whichever is longer. 



254 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



Obtaining Warranty Service. In order to obtain warranty service, you must receive warranty 
service authorization within the warranty period and provide dated proof of original purchase. 
Contact Sprint PCS for warranty service authorization except if you purchased product from 
www.handspring.com. For purchases made through www.handspring.com, contact Handspring 
for warranty service authorization. For further information about the warranty service 
procedure, please visit our website at http://www.handspring.com. 

Warranty Exclusive. This warranty is exclusive and Handspring will not assume and hereby 
expressly disclaims any further warranties, including, but not limited to, any warranty of 
merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement. 

Limitation of Liability. To the full extent allowed by law, Handspring's liability is limited to 
repair or replacement of the product, or refund of the purchase price paid. Handspring shall not 
be liable for any incidental, consequential, indirect, special or punitive damages of any kind, or 
for loss of revenue or profits, loss of business, loss of information or data, or other financial loss 
arising out of or in connection with the sale, installation, maintenance, use, performance, 
failure, or interruption of this product. 

Governing Law. This warranty will be governed by the laws of California, and excluding the 
United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. The courts of 
California shall have exclusive personal jurisdiction in case of any disputes arising out of or in 
connection with this warranty. 

Handspring, Inc. 

End User Software License Agreement 

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS SOFTWARE, THE USE OF WHICH IS LICENSED BY HANDSPRING, 
INC. AND ITS SUPPLIERS (COLLECTIVELY, "HANDSPRING") , TO ITS CUSTOMERS FOR THEIR 
USE ONLY AS SET FORTH BELOW. 

Software License: Handspring grants you a nonexclusive license to use the accompanying 
software program(s) (the "Software") subject to the terms and restrictions set forth in this End 
User Software License Agreement ("License Agreement"). You are not permitted to lease or rent, 
distribute or sublicense the Software or to use the Software in a time-sharing arrangement or in 
any other unauthorized manner. Further, no license is granted to you in the human readable 
code of the Software (source code). Except as provided below, this License Agreement does not 
grant you any rights to patents, copyrights, trade secrets, trademarks, or any other rights in 
respect to the Software. 

The Software is licensed to be used solely on or in connection with Handspring products. With 
respect to the Desktop Software, you may reproduce and provide one (1) copy of such Software for 
each personal computer on which such Software is used as pennitted hereunder. With respect to 
the Device Software, you may use such Software only on one (1) Handspring product. Otherwise, 
the Software and supporting documentation may be copied only as essential for backup or 
archive purposes in support of your use of the Software as permitted hereunder. You must 
reproduce and include all copyright notices and any other proprietary rights notices appearing 
on the Software on any copies that you make. 

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License Agreement, this License Agreement shall not 
be deemed to apply to any applications software licensed to you by third parties that is included 
on the same media as Handspring's Software ("Other Software") if the Other Software provides 
that the use of the Other Software is subject to the terms and conditions of the third party's license 
agreement. 

Portions of the Software are licensed to Handspring, and from Handspring to you, pursuant to the 
GNU library General Public License ("GNU Software"), a copy of which is supplied herewith and 
incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference. Notwithstanding any other provision of this 
License Agreement, this License Agreement shall not be deemed to apply to the GNU Software. 
Source code versions of the GNU Software are available at Handspring's web site, currently located 
at www.handspring.com. 

Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



Payment of Fees: The effectiveness of the licenses granted hereunder is conditioned on the 
receipt by Handspring of any applicable fees. 

No Assignment No Reverse Engineering: You may transfer the Software and this License 
Agreement to another party in connection with a transfer of the Handspring product upon which 
the Software is used, if the other party agrees in writing to accept the terms and conditions of this 
License Agreement. If you transfer the Software, you must at the same time either transfer all 
copies of the Software as well as the supporting documentation to the same party or destroy any 
such materials not transferred. Except as set forth above, you may not transfer or assign the 
Software or your rights under this License Agreement. 

Modification, reverse engineering, reverse compiling, or disassembly of the Software is expressly 
prohibited. However, if you are a European Union ("EU") resident, information necessary to 
achieve interoperability of the Software with other programs within the meaning of the EU 
Directive on the Legal Protection of Computer Programs is available to you from Handspring 
upon written request. 

Export Restrictions: You agree that you will not export or re-export the Software or 
accompanying documentation (or any copies thereof) or any products utilizing the Software or 
such documentation in violation of any applicable laws or regulations of the United States or the 
country in which you obtained them. The software covered by this License Agreement may 
contain strong data encryption code which cannot be exported outside of the U.S. or Canada. You 
agree that you will not export/reexport, either physically or electronically, the encryption software 
or accompanying documentation without obtaining written authorization from the U.S. 
Department of Commerce. 

United States Government Legend: If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit 
or agency of the United States Government, the following provisions apply. The Software 
constitutes a "commercial item", as that term is defined at Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 
2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer 
software documentation", as such terms are used in FAR 12.212 (Sept. 1995), and is provided to 
the U.S. Government only as commercial software (with "Restricted Rights", if applicable). Use, 
duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions set forth in this License 
Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1 (a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995) , DFARS 252.227- 
7013(c)(1)(B) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), 
as applicable. 

Term and Termination: This License Agreement is effective until terminated. You may 
terminate it at any time by destroying the Software and documentation together with all copies 
and merged portions in any form. It will also terminate immediately if you fail to comply with 
any term or condition of this License Agreement. Upon such termination you agree to destroy the 
Software and documentation, together with all copies and merged portions in any form. 

Governing Law: This License Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California 
as such laws are applied to agreements entered into and to be perforated entirely within 
California between California residents and by the laws of the United States. You agree that the 
conflicts of laws principles of such laws and the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the 
International Sale of Goods (1980) are hereby excluded in its entirety from application to this 
License Agreement. 

Limited Warranty; Limitation of Liability: All warranties and limitations of liability 
applicable to the Software are as stated on the Limited Warranty or in the product manual 
accompanying the Software. Such warranties and limitations of liability are incorporated herein 
in their entirety by this reference. 

Severability: In the event any provision of this License Agreement is found to be invalid, illegal 
or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of any of the remaining provisions shall 
not in any way be affected or impaired and a valid, legal and enforceable provision of similar 
intent and economic impact shall be substituted therefor. 



256 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



Entire Agreement This License Agreement sets forth the entire understanding and agreement 
between you and Handspring, supersedes all prior agreements, whether written or oral, with 
respect to the Software, and may be amended only in a writing signed by both parties. 

GNU Library General Public License 

Version 2, June 1991 

Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 

59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. 

Eveiyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but 
changing it is not allowed. 

[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 
2 of the ordinary GPL.] 

Preamble: The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and 
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom 
to share and change free software— to make sure the software is free for all its users. 

This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some specially designated Free 
Software Foundation software, and to any other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can 
use it for your libraries, too. 

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public 
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software 
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, 
that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you 
can do these things. 

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights 
or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you 
if you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of 
the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. 
You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link a program with 
the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them 
with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them 
these terms so they know their rights. 

Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you 
this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. 

Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain that eveiyone understands that 
there is no warranty for this free library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, 
we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original version, so that any problems 
introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. 

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the 
danger that companies distributing free software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in 
effect transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we have made it clear 
that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. 

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public 
License, which was designed for utility programs. This license, the GNU Library General Public 
License, applies to certain designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary 
one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same as in the ordinary 
license. 

The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that they blur the distinction 
we usually make between modifying or adding to a program and simply using it. Linking a 
program with a library, without changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



257 



and is analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in a textual and 
legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a derivative of the original library, and the 
ordinary General Public License treats it as such. 

Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General Public License for libraries did not 
effectively promote software sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We 
concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better. 

However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the users of those programs of 
all benefit from the free status of the libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is 
intended to permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while preserving your 
freedom as a user of such programs to change the free libraries that are incorporated in them. 
(We have not seen how to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it 
as regards changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead to faster 
development of free libraries. 

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close 
attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the 
library". The former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only works together 
with the library. 

Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary General Public License rather 
than by this special one. 

Terms and Conditions for Copying, Distribution and Modification 

1 . This License Agreement applies to any software library which contains a notice placed by 
the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms 
of this Library General Public License (also called "this License") . Each licensee is 
addressed as "you". 

A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be 
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and 
data) to form executables. 

The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been 
distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or 
any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a 
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly 
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term 
"modification".) 

"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications 
to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it 
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control 
compilation and installation of the library. 

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this 
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not 
restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work 
based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it) . 
Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the 
Library does. 

2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you 
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on 
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the 
notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy 
of this License along with the Library. 

Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



3. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your 
option offer warrant)' protection in exchange for a fee. 

4. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a 
work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the 
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: 

a) The modified work must itself be a software library. 

b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed 
the files and the date of any change. 

c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties 
under the terms of this License. 

d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied 
by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when 
the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event 
an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and 
performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a 
library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of 
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function 
or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the 
square root function must still compute square roots.) 

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that 
work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and 
separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those 
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same 
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the 
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to 
the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. 
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work 
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution 
of derivative or collective works based on the Library. 

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library 
(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium 
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 

5. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this 
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to 
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, 
instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General 
Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not 
make any other change in these notices. 

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary 
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made 
from that copy. 

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program 
that is not a library. 

6. You may copy and distribute the Libraiy (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) 
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that 
you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which 
must be distributed under the tenns of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



259 



used for software interchange. 

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, 
then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the 
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to 
copy the source along with the object code. 

7. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work 
with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the 
Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore 
falls outside the scope of this License. 

However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that 
is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library) , rather than a 
"work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 
states terms for distribution of such executables. 

When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the 
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though 
the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be 
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true 
is not precisely defined by law. 

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, 
and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of 
the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. 
(Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under 
Section 6.) 

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for 
the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall 
under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 

8. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or link a "work that uses the 
Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and 
distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit 
modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for 
debugging such modifications. 

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it 
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this 
License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the 
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to 
the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: 

a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code 
for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be 
distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above) ; and, if the work is an executable linked with the 
Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code 
and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a 
modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who 
changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to 
recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) 

b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same 
user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of 
performing this distribution. 



260 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, 
offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. 

d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have 
already sent this user a copy. 

For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any 
data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a 
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally 
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, 
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that 
component itself accompanies die executable. 

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other 
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a 
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable 
that you distribute. 

9. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single 
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such 
a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library 
and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two 
things: 

a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, 
uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of 
the Sections above. 

b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work 
based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form 
of the same work. 

1 0. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as 
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify', sublicense, 
link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights 
under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under 
this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full 
compliance. 

1 1 . You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing 
else grants you permission to modify or distribute die Library or its derivative works. These 
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or 
distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library) , you indicate your acceptance 
of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or 
modifying the Library or works based on it. 

12. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library) , the recipient 
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or 
modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further 
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible 
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 

1 3. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any 
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by 
court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of diis License, they do 
not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy 
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent 
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive 
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and 
this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. 
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular 
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is 
intended to apply in other circumstances. 

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property 
right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of 
protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by 
public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range 
of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that 
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software 
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. 
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of 
the rest of this License. 

1 4. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by 
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library 
under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding 
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus 
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of 
this License. 

1 5. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Library 
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the 
present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. 

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version 
number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of 
following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published 
by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, 
you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 

1 6. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution 
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For 
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software 
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the 
two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of 
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. 

NO WARRANTY 

1 7. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR 
THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN 
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES 
PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER 
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED 
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE 
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. 
SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY 
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 

1 8. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING 



262 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR 
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR 
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL 
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING 
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR 
LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO 
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE) , EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY 
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS 

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Library 

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we 
recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by 
permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary 
General Public License). 

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the 
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should 
have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. 

One line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does. 
Copyright (C) year name of author 

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU 
Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of 
the License, or (at your option) any later version. 

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; 
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR 
PURPOSE. See the GNU Library General Public License for more details. 

You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public License along with this 
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, 
MA 02111-1307, USA. 

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get 
your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright 
disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: 

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library "Frob' (a library for tweaking 
knobs) written by James Random Hacker. 

Signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 
Ty Coon, President of Vice 

That's all there is to it! 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



263 



Acknowledgments 

We would like to thank the following developers whose contributions were an integral part of the 
Handspring product: 

^ C.E. SteuartDewar 

Pimlico Software, Inc. 

www.gorilla-haven.org/pimlico 
^ Darren Beck 

Code City 

www.codecity.com.au 
^ Rick Huebner 

www.probe.net/~rhuebner/index.html 



264 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



Section 1 1 
Other Product Information 



265 



Section 1 1 

Other Product Information 



Index 

Numerics 

3-way calling 102 

A 

ABA (Address Book archive file) 
32 

Accented characters 
entering 26 

onscreen keyboard 32 
Active call 97, 101 
Add-on applications 39-42 
Address Book 

archive files (.aba) 32 
Address Book.See PhoneBook 
Adjusting volume 6 
Alarm 

preset 134 

reminder 134 

setting 117 

sound 134,197, 241 

for untimed events 117 
Anniversaries. See Repeating 

events 
Answering calls 97-99 
Antenna 7 

Application buttons 6, 10, 36, 48, 

49, 50, 52,190 
Applications 

beaming 78-79 

Blazer 50, 139 

Calculator 55 

categories 37-38 

CityTime 54 

Date Book Plus 49 

Expense 56 

font style 75 

installing 39-42 

Memo Pad 51 

opening 36 

PhoneBook 48 

preferences for 39 



removing 42 

security 43 

SMS Messaging 52 

To Do List 53 

viewing as icons 38 

viewing as list 38 

See also Add-on applications 
Applications Launcher 36-39 
Appointments. See Date Book 

Plus 
Archive files 

importing data from 32 

for main applications 32 

saving deleted records 61 

saving purged records 62 
Automatic fill, in Expense 187 
Auto-off delay 196 
Autotext. See Keyboard Short- 
cuts 

B 

Backlight, keyboard 10 
Backup. See HotSync 
Battery 
charging 9 

conserving power 196 

gauge 36, 83 
Beaming 

See also Infrared 
Beaming information 78-80 

location of IR port 7 

problems with 247 
Beep tone 101 

Birthdays. See Repeating events 
Blazer 

adding bookmarks 141, 142 
Bookmark view 140 
deleting bookmarks 143 
editing bookmarks 143 
menus 145 
opening 50 

organizing bookmarks 144 
overview 50 
Preferences 147 



Index 265 



Properties 146 

Web Page view 139 
Bold font for text 75 
Bookmarks 

adding 141,142 

arranging 144 

deleting 143 

editing 143 
Brightness control 6, 11 
Business card for beaming 78 
Buttons 

power 7 

ringer 7 

scroll 6, 89, 140 
Buttons preferences 190 

C 

Cable 

connecting to computer 19 
for local HotSync operations 76 
serial 2, 19, 217, 246 
USB 2, 19 
Calculator 
Advanced mode 167 
Area view 174 
Basic mode 166 
buttons explained 166-167, 

168-176 
Finance view 170 
Length view 174 
Logic view 172 
Math view 169 
memory 167 
menus 177 
opening 55, 166 
overview 55 

recent calculations 55, 167 
selecting mode 166 
Statistics view 172 
Trigonometry view 169 
Volume view 175 
Weight/Temp view 173 
Calibration 12, 194, 241 



Call 

Preferences 104, 109, 242 

status 101 

waiting 101 
Call History 105 

adding to PhoneBook 95 

adding to Speed Dial list 96 

deleting items 96 

dialing from 95 

displaying 94 

incoming calls 94 

missed calls 94, 105 

outgoing calls 94 

purging 96 
Caller ID 98, 102, 105 
Calls 

3-way 102 

active 97,101 

answering 97-99 

answering call waiting 101 

conference 102 

forwarding 104 

ignoring 98 

incoming 94, 97-104 

missed 94, 105 

outgoing 94, 104-105 

placing a second 102 

placing on hold 100 

switching 102 
Capital letters 24 
Caring for the communicator 232 
Categories 

application 37-38 

assigning records to 62-63 

beaming 78-79 

creating 64-65 

default 62 

displaying 64,108,245 
merging 65 
renaming 65 

using in Applications Launcher 
37, 38 



266 Index 



Chain calculations 167 
Charger 

connecting 9, 19 

connector on communicator 8 
Charging battery 9 
Check boxes 13 
CityTime 

adding cities 164 

home city 163 

menus 164 

opening 54 

overview 163 

remote cities 163 
Clearing Calculator entries 166, 
168 

Color control 6, 11 
depth 147 

COM port. See USB, port and Se- 
rial port 

Combining categories 65 

Comma delimited files, importing 
data from 32 

Command buttons 13 

Command equivalents (keyboard) 
29 

Communicator 

contrast control 6, 1 1 

overview 2 

turning on/off 10 
Compressing Day view 133 
Conduits 218 

for connecting to PIMs 22 

for synchronizing applications 
247,218-219, 237 

See also HotSync 
Conference calls 102 
Conflicting events 126 
Connecting 

headset 18 

HotSync cable 19 

service templates 198 

to packet data network 202 

travel charger 9, 19 
Connection preferences 191 



Contact information. See Phone- 
Book 
Contacts 

copying 91 
Continuous events 

changing 119 

deleting from Date Book Plus 
61, 119 

scheduling 118 
Copying 

contact information 91 
Copying text 60 
Country default setting 195 
Coverage area 94, 97, 104, 105 
Cradle. See Cable 
Creating 

categories 37-38, 64-65 

contact entries 89-90 

currency symbols 181 

custom fields in PhoneBook 
110 

Date Book Plus events 113 

Expense items 178 

expense reports in Excel 1 83— 
186 

memos 149 

notes for records 74 

records 58 

To Do List items 158 
Currency 

default 187 

defining 181 

for Expense items 180 
Current date 17,245 
Current time 36 

displaying in Date Book Plus 
122 

setting 16 
Customizing 

categories 65 

currencies and symbols 181 
fields in PhoneBook 110 
HotSync settings 218 
See also Preferences 



Index 267 



Cutting text 60 

Cycling through views 48, 49, 50 
0 

Daily 

calendar 113-116 

events. See Repeating events 

Journal 129 
Data 

entry. See Entering data 

transfer. See HotSync 
Date Book 

archive files (.dba) 32 
Date Book Plus 

adding PhoneBook data to 
records 68-69 

alarm 117 

changing event time 116 

changing event to untimed 116 

changing repeating events 119 

conflicting events 126 

continuous events 118-121 

creating records 58, 114-116 

Daily Journal 129 

Day view 121 

deleting records 60 

deleting repeating events 119 

end time for Day view 132 

Event tracking 129 

floating events 127 

fonts 75 

List View 125 

menus 130 

Month view 124 

notes for records 74-75 

opening 49 

overview 49 

private records 72 

purging records 61-62 

repeating events 61, 118-121 

scheduling events 113-116 

selecting dates 113 

start time for Day view 132 



Sunday or Monday to start 

week 195 
switching views 121 
templates 129 
To Do List items 128 
untimed events 114, 115 
Week view 122, 195, 245 
Week View with Text 123 
Year View 125 
Dates 
Expense item 179 
setting current 17, 245 
To Do List record due 159-160, 
160 

Day (Date Book Plus view) 114, 
133 

DBA (Date Book archive file) 32 

Decimal point 196 

Default 

categories 62 

currency in Expense 187 

settings. See Preferences 
Deleted 

data, saving in archive files 61 
Deleting 

applications 40, 42 

Bookmarks 143 

Call History 96 

Desktop software 43 

passwords 45 

records 60 

service templates 208 
SMS messages 155 
Speed Dial entries 88 
text 60 

See also Purging records 
Desktop software 21 
linking to external files 227 
removing 43 

saving deleted data to an ar- 
chive file 61 
system requirements 2 
upgrading 3 
See also PIM 



268 Index 



Dial Pad 

dialing numbers 89 

icon 89 
Dialing 

applications 110 

emergency numbers 105 

from Call History 95 

from Contacts list 91 

last number 105 

previous numbers 89, 94 

with Dial Pad 89 

with Speed Dial 86 
Digital roaming 109 
Digitizer 12, 194, 241 
Display control 6, 11 
Display, contrast (brightness) 

control 6 
DNS (Domain Naming System) 
207 

Docking station. See Cable 
Double-booked events 126 
Dragging 
memos into other applications 
51 

using the stylus 12 

E 

Edit 

call forwarding number 104 

phone number 86 

Speed Dial 87,88 
Editing 

records 59-60 
Electronic Serial Number 8 
E-mail addresses 

in PhoneBook92 
Email messages 151 
Emergency numbers 105 
Entering data 23-33 

importing from other applica- 
tions 32-33 

using communicator keyboard 
24-31 



using the computer keyboard 
32 

using the onscreen keyboard 
31 

Entries. See PhoneBook 
Events. See Date Book Plus 
Excel, transferring Expense data 
to 182-186 
Exchanging data. See HotSync 
Exclamation marks in To Do List 

162 
Expense 

adding PhoneBook data to 
records 70 

categorizing records 63 

creating records 58, 178 

currency 180, 187 

date of item 179 

defining new currency 181 

deleting records 60 

menus 186 

notes for records 74-75 
opening 56 
overview 56 
purging records 61-62 
receipt details 179 
reports in Excel 183-186 
sorting records 71 
templates for reports 185 
type 180, 187 
vendor 180 

F 

Files, linking to external 227 
Finding 
applications 36 

information in applications 66- 
70 

phone numbers 68-69 
using the Find application 67 

Floating events 127 

Fonts 75 

Formats preferences 195 



Index 269 



Forwarding 
calls 104 
Frozen communicator 241 

G 

Games 197 
General preferences 

alarm sounds 197 

auto-off delay 196 

system sounds 197 
Glossary. See Keyboard Short- 
cuts 

H 

Handheld mode 10 
Hard reset 235 
Headset 

connecting 18 
Headset jack 6 
Help 

Keyboard 60 

online tips 15 
Hiding 

records 72 

See also Private records 
Hold button 100 
HotSync 

buttons preferences 191 

conduits for synchronizing ap- 
plications 218-219, 237 

customizing 218 

defined 76 

first-time operation 76-77, 228— 
229 

HotSync Manager 76 
I R operation 219-225 
linking to external files 227 
local operation 77, 217 
network operation 225 
operations using IR port 219- 
225 

problems with 246-247 
setting options 216-217 
for synchronizing data 20 



I 

Icons 

alarm 117 

application 38 

battery 83 

Call History 94 

Dial Pad 89 

note 74 

online Tips 15 

onscreen 241 

repeating event 119 

signal strength 83 

Voicemail 83 
Ignoring calls 98 
Importing data 32-33 
Incoming calls 94, 97-104 
Indicators 

battery 8, 83 

call status 101 

missed call 105 

signal strength 83 

time 83 

voicemail 83 

wireless mode 83 
Infrared 

HotSync operations 219-225 

port 219 

requirements for computer 220 
Infrared port. See IR port 
Installing 

applications 39-42 

conduit to install applications 
218 

Desktop software 21, 240 
International characters 
entering 26 

onscreen keyboard 32 
IP address 202, 203, 205, 206 
IR port 7 

See also Beaming information 
IR. See Infrared 

Items. See To Do List or Expense 



270 Index 



K 

Key Pad 87, 97 
Keyboard 

accented characters 26 

capital letters 24 

computer 32 

location 7 

menu commands 29 
moving the cursor 28 
numbers 25 
online Help 60 
onscreen 31, 32 
Shortcuts for entering data 30, 
213-214 
Keyboard backlight 10 

L 

LED 8, 9 
Letters 

font style 75 

onscreen keyboard 31 
Light, see LED 8 
Linking 

external file 227 

with desktop software. See 
HotSync 
List (Date Book Plus view) 125 
List, in Applications Launcher 38 
Locking 

communicator with a pass- 
word 210 

records. See Security 
Looking up PhoneBook data 

to add to other records 68-69 

scrolling in Contacts view 66 
Looking up. See Finding 
Lost communicator, contact for 
91 

Lost records 245 
Lotus 

Organizer, importing data from 
32 



M 

Main applications 36 
Maintenance information 232 
Meetings. See Date Book Plus 
Memo Pad 

adding PhoneBook data to 
records 68-69 

archive files (.mpa) 33 

categorizing records 62 

creating records 58, 149 

deleting records 60 

dragging memos into other ap- 
plications 51 

fonts 75 

menus 150 

opening 51 

overview 51 

private records 72 

reviewing memos 149 

sorting records 71, 245 

See also Notes 
Memory 

for beaming 247 

Calculator 167 

regaining 61 
Memos. See Memo Pad 
Menus 28-30, 241 

Blazer 145 

choosing 29 

command equivalents (key- 
board) 29 
Date Book Plus 130 
Edit menu 59-60 
Expense 186 
Memo Pad 150,164,177 
menu bar 13, 29 
Network Preferences 209 
PhoneBook 106 
SMS Messaging 156 
To Do List 162 
Messages 
checking 94 
missed call 105 



Index 271 



purging SMS 155 

receiving 151 

replying 153 

sorting SMS 155 

text 152 
Microphone 6 
Microsoft 

Excel, transferring Expense 
data to 182-186 

Outlook, connecting to 247 

Windows 95, 98 220 
Missed calls 94, 105 
Mobile IP 197, 202 
Modes 

handheld 10 

wireless 10 
Monday, to start week 195 
Month (Date Book Plus view) 124 
Moving 

Date Book Plus events 116 

the cursor 28 
MPA (Memo Pad archive file) 33 
Multi-day events. See Repeating 
events 

N 

Network 

connecting 202 

password 200 

preferences 197-210 

primary DNS 207 

secondary DNS 207 

selecting service 198 

Simple IP 197 

status 8 

time 83 

user name 199 
Network HotSync operation 225 
Network status 104 
Notes 

attaching to records 74-75 
See also Memo Pad 



Numbers 
decimal point and thousands 

separator 196 
entering 25 
onscreen keyboard 31 

0 

Onscreen keyboard 31, 60 
Opening 

applications 36 

Blazer 50 

Calculator 55, 166 

CityTime 54 

Date Book Plus 49 

Expense 56 

Memo Pad 51 

PhoneBook48 

SMS Messaging 52 

To Do List 53 
Organizer (Lotus PIM)32 
Outgoing calls 94, 104-105 
Outlook, connecting to 247 
Overlapping events 126 
Overview 

communicator 2 
Owner preferences 210 

P 

Palm Desktop software. See 

Desktop software 
Passwords 44-46 

changing 45 

creating 44 

deleting 45 

for network 200 

forgotten 46, 248 
Pasting text 60 
Payment, Expense item 180 
Personal information managers. 

See PIM 
Phone application 

starting 86, 105 
Phone Lookup 68-69 



272 Index 



Phone numbers 
selecting types 92 

PhoneBook 
*lf Found Call* entry 91 
adding contact to Speed Dial 
85 

adding custom fields 110 
adding entry from Call History 
95 

business card for beaming 78 
categorizing Contacts records 
63 

copying records 91 
creating contact records 85- 

86, 89-91 
creating records 58, 89-90 
deleting Contacts records 60 
dialing from Contacts list 91 
Dialing Preferences 110 
displaying category 108 
finding Contacts records 66-67 
fonts 75 
menus 106 

notes for Contacts records 74- 
75 

opening 48 
overview 48 

private Contacts records 72 
sorting Contacts records 71 
Pick lists 13 

PIM (personal information man- 
ager) 

using with communicator 22 
Ports 

IR on communicator 219 
Ports. See USB, port and Serial 
port 

Power button 7, 10 
PPP 202, 205 

PRC (application file extension) 41 
Preferences 15 

Blazer 147 

Buttons 190 

choosing 39 



Connection 191 

dialing 110 

Digitizer 194 

Formats 195 

General 196 

HotSync buttons 191 

Network 197-210 

Owner 210 

roaming 109 

Shortcuts 213 
Primary DNS 207 
Printing 

expense reports from Excel 
183-186 

records from applications 21 
Prioritizing To Do List records 158, 
162 

Private records 

displaying and creating 72, 245 

lost with forgotten password 46 

See also Security 
Profiles 228 
Proxy server 148 
Punctuation marks 

onscreen keyboard 31 

typing 25 
Purging 

Call History 96 

records 61-62 

See also Deleting 

SMS messages 155 

R 

Range of times in Day view 132 
Receipts, recording in Expense 
179 

Receiving data. See Beaming in- 
formation 
Records 

beaming 78-79 

choosing categories 62 

creating 58 

Date Book Plus 114 

defined 57 



Index 273 



deleting 60, 119 
displaying a category of 64 
editing 59-60 
Expense 178 
fonts 75 

hiding private 44, 72 

lost 245 

Memo Pad 149 

notes for 74-75 

PhoneBook82, 89 

private 72 

purging 61-62 

sorting 71 

To Do List 158 
Recurring events 

deleting 61 

scheduling 118 
Redialing a number 105 
Reminder. See Alarm 
Removing 

applications 42 

Desktop software 43 
Renaming categories 65 
Repeating events 

deleting from Date Book Plus 
61 

scheduling 118 
Rescheduling events 116 
Reset button 8 
Resetting communicator 

hard reset 235 

location of reset button 8, 233 

soft reset 233 

warm reset 234 
Ringer 

settings 211 

switch 7 
Roaming 109 
Rocker switch 6, 10, 15 

S 

Saving 

data 37, 58, 61 
Scheduling events 113-116 



Screen 
blank 241 

brightness control 6, 11 
calibrating 12, 194 
caring for 232 
contrast control 6, 11 
touching 7 
Scroll bar 14 

Scroll buttons 6, 15, 89,140 
Searching. See Finding 
Secondary DNS 207 
Security 43-46 

changing password 45 

deleting password 45 

displaying owner's name 210 

forgotten password 46 

private records 72 
Selecting 

date for event 113 

phone numbers in Contacts list 
92 

text 59, 60 
Sending 
data. See Beaming informa- 
tion 

Serial port 2, 8, 217,246 
Service templates 198, 208 
Service, selecting for network 198 
Settings. See Preferences 
Shortcuts 

backing up 218 

managing 213-214 

menu commands 29 

predefined 30 

using 30 
Signal strength 83 
Simple IP 197, 205 
Slider 211 
SMS 

calling sender 153 

copying text 154 

deleting messages 155 

Inbox 152 



274 Index 



purging messages 155 

receiving messages 151 

replying to messages 153 

sorting messages 155 
SMS Messaging 

menus 156 

opening 52 

overview 52 
Soft reset 233 
Sorting 

applications 37 

records 71, 245 
Sorting messages 155 
Sounds. See Alarm and System 

sounds 
Speaker 6 
Speakerphone 100 
Speed Dial 

adding Call History entries 96 

adding contact entries 85 

changing entries 87 

defining buttons 84 

deleting entries 88 

dialing numbers 86 

list 84-88 

organizing 84, 88 

voicemail 84 
Standing Meetings. See Repeat- 
ing events 
Starting applications 36 
Stylus 7 

dragging with 12 

holding 7 

tapping with 12 
Sunday, to start week 195 
Switching calls 102 
Symbols 

for currency 180 
Synchronizing data. See HotSync 
System conduit 218 
System requirements for Desktop 

software 2 
System sounds 197 



Tab delimited files, importing data 

from 32 
Tapping 12, 241 
Task. See To Do List 
TCP/IP 209 

TDA (To Do List archive file) 33 
Technical Support 249 
Templates 

for Date Book Plus 129 

for expense reports 185 
Text 

copying 60 

cutting 60 

entry. See Entering data 
finding 66 
fonts for 75 

importing data from files 32 

selecting all 60 
Thousands separator 196 
Time 

alarm setting 117 

format 195 

setting current 16 

setting event 114 

start and end for Date Book 
Plus Day view 132 
Time bars in Date Book Plus 133 
Time stamps 129 
Tips, online 15 
To Do List 

adding PhoneBook data to 
records 68-69 

archive files (.tda) 33 

categorizing records 62, 135, 
162 

checking off items 128, 160 
completed items 161 
completion date 162 
creating items in Date Book 

Plus 128 
creating records 58, 158 
deleting records 60 
due date 159-160, 160, 161,162 



Index 275 



fonts 75 
menus 162 

notes for records 74-75 
opening 53 
overview 53 

prioritizing records 158, 162 

private records 72 

purging records 61-62, 161 

sorting records 71 

viewing items in Date Book 
Plus 123,125 
Today. See Current date 
Tracking events 129 
Transferring data. See HotSync 
Transmitting data. See Beaming 

information 
Turning off communicator 

automatically 196 

problems with 241 
Turning on and off 10 
Turning on communicator 

application buttons 7 

displaying owner's name 210 

problems with 241 
Typing 

punctuation marks 25 
Typing. See Entering data 

U 

Undoing actions 60 
Uninstalling Desktop software 43 
Unlock code 242 
Unresponsive communicator 241 
Untimed events 114, 115, 116, 117 
Updating data. See HotSync 
Upgrading Desktop software 3 
USB 

connector 8 

HotSync operations 246 

port 20 
User name 

for packet data network 199 

identifying communicator 210 
User profiles 228 



V 

Vendor for Expense item 180 
Vibrate 211 
Voicemail84, 97,105 

icon 83 
Volume 6 

W 

Warm reset 234 
Web pages 

bookmarking 140 

viewing 139 
Web sites 22 

Week (Date Book Plus view) 122- 

123,195,245 
Week with Text (Date Book Plus 

view) 123 
Windows 95, NT 2, 19, 246 
Wireless mode 10 
indicator 83 

troubleshooting 242-244 

X 

XLT (Expense report template in 
Excel) 185 

Y 

Year (Date Book Plus view) 125 



276 Index